Official Software
Get notified when we add a new AcuraTSX Manual

We cover 60 Acura vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

2006-2009 Acura CSX Service Repair Manual PDF
2007 Acura MDX Service Repair Manual PDF
2001-2006--Acura--TL--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI SOHC--32640001
Acura Rdx Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L Turbo (2008))
Acura Mdx Workshop Manual (V6-3471cc 3.5L (2002))
2001-2006--Acura--RL--6 Cylinders 3.5L FI SOHC--32983701
Acura - RDX - Workshop Manual - 2013 - 2013
Acura - MDX - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2009
Acura Tl Workshop Manual (V6-3206cc 3.2L SOHC MFI (1998))
Acura Nsx Workshop Manual (V6-3.2L DOHC (VTEC) (1997))
2001-2006--Acura--RL--6 Cylinders 3.5L MFI SOHC--32884201
Acura Mdx Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2007))
2001-2006--Acura--NSX--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI DOHC VTEC--32659601
Acura Nsx Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L DOHC (1991))
Acura Rdx Awd Workshop Manual (L4-2.3L Turbo (2010))
1991 Honda Acura NSX Service Repair Manual PDF
Acura Rl Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007))
Acura Nsx-t Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L DOHC (VTEC) (1998))
Acura Rl Workshop Manual (V6-3474cc 3.5L (1998))
Acura - MDX - Sales Brochure - 2010 - 2010
Acura - MDX - Workshop Manual - (2002)
Acura Rl Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2009))
Acura - MDX - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013
Acura Tl Fwd Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2009))
Acura Tl Workshop Manual (V6-3.2L (2004))
Acura TL 2004 2006 UA6 Service Repair Manual PDF
Acura Tl Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2010))
Acura 3.2tl Type S Workshop Manual (V6-3.2L SOHC (2002))
Acura - RDX - Sales Brochure - 2018 - 2018
Acura - TL - Workshop Manual - 2002 - 2008
Acura - MDX - Parts catalogue - 2016 - 2016
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2002
Acura Tl Workshop Manual (V6-3.5L (2007))
Acura Tl Workshop Manual (L5-2451cc 2.5L SOHC G25A4 FI (1995))
Acura Nsx Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L DOHC (VTEC) (1998))
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2003
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2004
Acura Tl Workshop Manual (L5-2451cc 2.5L SOHC MFI (1997))
Acura - RL - Owners Manual - 2009 - 2009
Acura Nsx Workshop Manual (V6-3.2L DOHC (2001))
Acura - RLX - Wiring Diagram - 1998 - 1998
Acura 3.5rl Workshop Manual (V6-3474cc 3.5L (2001))
2001-2006--Acura--NSX--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI DOHC VTEC--32751601
Acura - TL - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008
Acura - Auto - acura-rdx-2015-guide-du-proprietaire-57506
Acura - RDX - Sales Brochure - 2013 - 2013
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2001
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2006
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2008
Acura - RDX - Sales Brochure - 2017 - 2017
1986-1993--Acura--Vigor--5 Cylinders 2.5L MFI SOHC--31890401
Acura - RDX - Parts catalogue - 2007 - 2009
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura MDX 2005
Acura - MDX - Owners Manual - 2009 - 2013
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Acura - Acura TL 2004
1986-1993--Acura--Vigor--5 Cylinders 2.5L MFI SOHC--31749801
Acura Cl Workshop Manual (L4-2254cc 2.3L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (1998))
Acura - MDX - Other Document - 2015 - 2015
Acura - RDX - Other Document - 2015 - 2015
2001-2006--Acura--CL--6 Cylinders 3.2L MFI SOHC VTEC--32602001
Summary of Content
2012 TSX Sport Wagon Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year. © 2011 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved P/N 00X31-TL7-6100 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 0 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Contents This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features. The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. 2 Safe Driving P. 21 For Safe Driving P. 22 Seat Belts P. 26 Airbags P. 34 2 Instrument Panel P. 63 Indicators P. 64 Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 74 2 Controls P. 85 Setting the Clock P. 86 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 87 Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 104 Adjusting the Seats P. 118 2 Features P. 145 Audio System P. 146 Audio System Basic Operation P. 149 General Information on the Audio System P. 169 2 Driving P. 189 Before Driving P. 190 Refueling P. 221 Towing a Trailer P. 195 Fuel Economy P. 224 2 Maintenance P. 227 Before Performing Maintenance P. 228 Maintenance MinderTM P. 231 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 255 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 270 2 Handling the Unexpected P. 275 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire P. 276 Engine Does Not Start P. 284 Overheating P. 288 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 290 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 300 2 Information P. 303 Specifications P. 304 Emissions Testing P. 309 Identification Numbers P. 306 Warranty Coverages P. 311 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 1 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Contents Quick Reference Guide Child Safety P. 49 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 61 Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 93 Security System P. 99 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 105 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 127 Audio Error Messages P. 166 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver P. 173 Audio Remote Controls P. 168 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 175 When Driving P. 199 Accessories and Modifications P. 225 Braking P. 216 Maintenance Under the Hood P. 235 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 259 Cleaning P. 271 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 247 Battery P. 268 Jump Starting P. 285 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 287 Fuses P. 294 Emergency Towing P. 299 When You Cannot Open or Close the Tailagte P. 301 Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 307 Authorized Manuals P. 313 Reporting Safety Defects P. 308 Client Service Information P. 314 P. 2 Safety Labels P. 62 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 101 Adjusting the Mirror P. 116 Climate Control System P. 140 Safe Driving P. 21 Instrument Panel P. 63 Controls P. 85 Features P. 145 Driving P. 189 Maintenance P. 227 Handling the Unexpected P. 275 Information P. 303 Index P. 315 Compass * P. 187 Parking Your Vehicle P. 220 Remote Transmitter Care P. 269 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 2 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Quick Reference Guide Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ System Indicators (P64) ❙ Gauges (P74) ❙ Multi-Information Display (P75) ❙ Navigation System * () See Navigation System Manual ❙ Audio System (P146) ❙ Hazard Warning Button ❙ Climate Control System (P140) ❙ Rear Window Defogger/ Heated Door Mirror Button (P112) ❙ Seat Heater Switches (P138) ❙ Ignition Switch (P105) ❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P115) ❙ 2 (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P210) 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 3 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Quick Reference Guide ❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P106) ❙ Fog Lights (P108) ❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) (P205,206) ❙ Remote Audio Control Buttons (P168) ❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) (P205,206) ❙ Wipers/Washers (P109) ❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P207) ❙ SEL/RESET Button (P75) ❙ (Information) Button (P75) ❙ Horn ❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons * () See Navigation System Manual ❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P175) * Not available on all models 3 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 4 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ Driving Position Memory System Buttons (P113) ❙ Door Mirror Controls (P116) ❙ Rearview Mirror (P116) ❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P37) ❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P37) ❙ Parking Brake (P216) ❙ Glove Box (P129) ❙ Passenger Side Fuse Box (P295) ❙ Accessory Power Socket (P134) ❙ Driver Side Fuse Box (P294) ❙ Hood Release Handle (P 236) ❙ Driver’s Pocket ❙ Power Tailgate Button * (P93) ❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (Unlocking Fuel Fill Door) (P91) ❙ Power Window Switches (P101) 4 ❙ Shift Lever Automatic Transmission (P202) 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 5 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Quick Reference Guide ❙ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P31) ❙ Ceiling Light (P127) ❙ Seat Belt Installing a Child Seat (P56) ❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P57) ❙ Coat Hook (P135) ❙ Grab Handle ❙ Seat Belts (P26) ❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P44) ❙ Sunglasses Holder (P137) ❙ HomeLink® Button (P173) ❙ Moonroof Switch (P104) ❙ Spotlights (P127) ❙ Sun Visors ❙ Vanity Mirrors ❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P148) ❙ USB Adapter Cable (P147) ❙ Accessory Power Socket (P134) ❙ Center Pocket * ❙ Rear Seat (P125) ❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P54) ❙ Cargo Area Light (P128) ❙ Front Seat (P118) ❙ Side Airbags (P41) * Not available on all models 5 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 6 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P235) ❙ Windshield Wipers (P109, 255) ❙ Audio Antenna (P147) ❙ Door Mirrors (P116) ❙ Side Turn Signal Lights (P106,250) ❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P89) ❙ Headlights (P106, 247) ❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Lights (P106, 249) ❙ Tires (P259, 276) ❙ Fog Lights (P108, 248) ❙ How to Refuel (P222) ❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P251) ❙ Rear Wiper (P110, 257) ❙ Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P93) ❙ Tailgate Open Handle (P94) ❙ Rearview Camera * () See Navigation System Manual ❙ Back-Up Lights (P252) ❙ Brake/Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights (P251) ❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P251) 6 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 7 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Safe Driving (P21) ● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision. Child Safety (P49) ● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. ● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. ● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat. Quick Reference Guide Airbags (P34) Exhaust Gas Hazard (P61) ● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate. Seat Belts (P26) ● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat. ● Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly. Before Driving Checklist (P25) ● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted. Fasten your lap belt as low as possible. * Not available on all models 7 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 8 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Instrument Panel (P63) Quick Reference Guide Gauges (P 74) Multi-Information Display (P 75) System Indicators (P 64) Lights Reminders Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator Fog Light Indicator System Indicators Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Oil Pressure Indicator Multi-Information Display Temperature Gauge Tachometer Fuel Gauge Charging System Indicator Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Immobilizer System Indicator Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator Side Airbag Off Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System Indicator Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator VSA® OFF Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Indicator Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators CRUISE MAIN Indicator Electric Power Steering (EPS) Indicator CRUISE CONTROL Indicator Gear Position Indicator System Message Indicator Shift Lever Position Indicator Security System Alarm Indicator 8 Speedometer System Indicators Low Fuel Indicator 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 9 ページ Controls 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 (P 85) Turn Signal Control Lever Lights (P106) Light Control Switches Wipers and Washers (P109) Wiper/Washer Control Lever Right High Beam Adjustment Ring : Long Delay : Short Delay Low Beam Quick Reference Guide Turn Signals (P106) Flashing Left Pull toward you to spray washer fluid. MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe 9 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 10 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Quick Reference Guide Steering Wheel (P115) Power Door Mirrors ● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place. (P116) ● With the ignition switch in ON (w , move the selector switch to L or R. ● Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. Selector Switch Power Windows (P101) ● With the ignition switch in ON (w , open and close the power windows. ● If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch. ● If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled. Power Window Lock Button Tailgate (P93) Adjustment Switch ● Place the selector switch in the R position to use the reverse tilt door mirror feature. Window Switch ● With all the doors unlocked, pull the tailgate open handle on the tailgate to open it. Model with the power tailgate ● Press the power tailgate button on the driver’s door or the remote transmitter to open and close the power tailgate. 10 Indicator 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 11 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Climate Control System (P140) Clock (P86) ● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. ● Press the ON/OFF button to turn the system on or off. ● Press the button to defrost the windshield. Models without navigation system SYNC (Synchronized) Button AUTO Button Driver’s Side Temperature Control Switch ON/OFF Button (Recirculation) Button (Fan Control) Bar (Rear Window Defogger/ Heated Mirror) Button (Windshield Defroster) Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch Press the CLOCK button until the displayed time begins flashing. b Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to set the time. Press Preset (6 (Reset) to set the time to the nearest hour. c Press the CLOCK button again to set the time. Quick Reference Guide Models with navigation system The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete details. a Models with navigation system The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically. MODE Control Button Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and dashboard vents, and back of the center console. Air flows from dashboard vents and back of the center console. 11 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 12 ページ Features 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 ● Audio Remote Controls (P168) (P145) VOL Button MODE Button Quick Reference Guide Audio System (P146) For navigation system operation () See Navigation System Manual Audio Display (XM®) VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob CD Button Button AUX Button AM Button FM Button TITLE Button CD Slot (CD Eject) Button Preset Buttons SKIP Bar A.SEL (Auto Select) Button SCAN Button 12 CATEGORY Bar MENU Button RETURN Button Selector Knob CH Button ● VOL (volume) Button Press / to adjust the volume up/ down. ● MODE Button Press and release to change the audio mode: FM1/FM2/AM/XM1/XM2/CD/AUX. ● CH (channel) Button Radio:Press and release to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. CD/USB device: Press and release to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book Driving 13 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 (P189) ● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Paddle Shifters (P205) ● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual transmission (1st through 5th). This is useful for engine braking. ● Shifting Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked. Release Button Shift Lever (M Indicator Reverse Selected Gear Number Neutral Transmission is not locked. Drive Normal driving. D-paddle shift mode can be used. Shift Down (Paddle Shifter Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter ● D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising. ● Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M indicator comes on. ● The selected gear position is shown in the instrument panel. Quick Reference Guide Automatic Transmission (P203) S Position Sequential shift mode can be used. Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P . Press the release button to move the shift lever. Move the shift lever without pressing the release button. 13 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 14 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 VSA® OFF Button (P211) Quick Reference Guide ● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. ● VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine. ● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. Fuel recommendation: Premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 91 or higher recommended Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 L) a Unlock the driver’s door. b Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to make it pop up slightly. c Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap. d Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door. e After refueling, screw the cap back on until it clicks at least once. Cruise Control (P207) ● Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. ● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press DECEL/SET when the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h). Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P212) ● TPMS monitors tire pressure. ● TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine. 14 Refueling (P 221) 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 15 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Maintenance (P 227) a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard. b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up the hood. c Quick Reference Guide Under the Hood (P 235) ● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary. ● Check brake fluid. ● Check the battery regularly. Wiper Blades (P255) ● Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield. Tires (P259) Lights (P247) ● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Check tire pressures regularly. ● Install snow tires for winter driving. ● Inspect all lights regularly. When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place. 15 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 16 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Handling the Unexpected Quick Reference Guide Flat Tire (P276) ● Park in a safe location and repair the flat tire using the tire repair kit. Engine Won’t Start (P284) ● If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery. Overheating (P288) ● Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down. Indicators Come On Blown Fuse (P294) Emergency Towing (P290) ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate. (P299) ● Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual. 16 (P 275) ● Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 17 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 What to Do If ● The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 and I cannot remove the key. Why? The shift lever should be moved to (P . Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes? This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal. The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why? Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, push the lever to the unlock position. Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors using a remote transmitter? If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security. ● The steering wheel may be locked. Try to turn the steering wheel left and right while turning the ignition key. Quick Reference Guide The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q . Why? 17 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book Quick Reference Guide 18 18 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver’s door? The beeper sounds when: ● The key is left in the ignition switch. ● The exterior lights are left on. Why does the beeper sound when I start driving? The beeper sounds when: ● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. ● The parking brake lever is not fully released. Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal? The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Is it possible to use unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 87 or higher on this vehicle? The recommended fuel is premium unleaded gasoline with a PON of 91 or higher. If this fuel is not available, you can temporarily use unleaded gasoline with a PON of 87 or higher. This will result in decreased engine performance, and can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 19 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Event Data Recorders The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Service Diagnostic Recorders Quick Reference Guide California Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment. 19 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 20 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Quick Reference Guide A Few Words About Safety You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including: Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean: To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement. 3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions. 3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions. 3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions. ● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. ● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. ● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully. 20 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 21 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Safe Driving You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual. For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 22 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 24 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 26 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 29 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 33 Airbags Airbag System Components............... 34 Types of Airbags ................................ 37 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 37 Side Airbags....................................... 41 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 44 Airbag System Indicators.................... 45 Airbag Care ....................................... 48 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 49 Safety of Infants and Small Children .. 51 Safety of Larger Children ................... 59 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 61 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 62 21 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 22 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 For Safe Driving The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important. Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ■ Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly. ■ Restrain all children Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat. ■ Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual. ■ Don’t drink and drive Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either. 22 1Important Safety Precautions Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 23 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions ■ Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted. Safe Driving ■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving. ■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. 23 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 24 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features Your Vehicle’s Safety Features 1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features i hl c i Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash. f j d g h j k e b a g b a b c d e f g h i j k l Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags Side Airbags Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks Seat Belt Tensioners Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensor The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers. 24 Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash. However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 25 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features ■ Safety Checklist If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes off. 2 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator P. 68 Safe Driving For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. • After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate. 1Safety Checklist 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 91 • Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 118 • Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position. 2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 120 • Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 29 • Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight. 2 Child Safety P. 49 25 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 26 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts Safe Driving Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers ■ Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats. 2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 56 26 1About Your Seat Belts 3 WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly. Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury. Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 27 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Seat Belt Reminder 1About Your Seat Belts If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt. Safe Driving ■ Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: • All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. • Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. • Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. 1Seat Belt Reminder Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on. The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w . When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator will not come on. This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot detect their presence. The beeper will also periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are fastened. Continued 27 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 28 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. Safe Driving 28 The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags. 1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash. During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 29 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat: 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 118 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. Correct Seated Posture. No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible. Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism. Safe Driving Pull out slowly. 1Fastening a Seat Belt 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything. Latch Plate Buckle Continued 29 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 30 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe Driving Lap belt as low as possible 3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. 4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body. ■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants. 1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button. 2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. Push 30 1Fastening a Seat Belt 3 WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash. Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get caught by closing the door. 1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time. After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 31 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor 1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor 3 WARNING Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash. Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched. Latch Plate 2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle. Small Latch Plate Safe Driving 1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling. Small Latch Plate To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. Latch Plate Anchor Buckle Latch Plate 3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt. Small Latch Plate Buckle Continued 31 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 32 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Advice for Pregnant Women Safe Driving If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen. Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. 32 1Advice for Pregnant Women Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. • When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 33 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision. 3 WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed. Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible. Safe Driving • Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. • Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract. 1Seat Belt Inspection 33 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 34 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Airbags Airbag System Components Safe Driving h a kl i h a c gj j b e c d b h f h m e h 34 h 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 35 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG. b Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. d An electronic control unit that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in ON (w . front seat belt tensioners. The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts incorporate sensors that detect whether or not they are fastened. side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG. sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side collision. i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. e Automatic fA driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force. g Weight c Two h Impact sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child). Safe Driving The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. The airbag system includes: j Sensors that can detect if a child or small statured adult is in the deployment path of the front passenger’s side airbag. k An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners. l An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the front passenger’s side airbag has been turned off. m Safing Sensor Continued 35 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 36 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components ■ Important Facts About Your Airbags Safe Driving Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible. Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy. Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates. Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate. 36 1Important Facts About Your Airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection. When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 37 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: • Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. • Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs. • Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages. 1Types of Airbags Front Airbags (SRS) 1Front Airbags (SRS) SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system. ■ Housing Locations The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG. Continued Safe Driving The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w . Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes. 37 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 38 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Operation Safe Driving Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate. A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall. ■ How the Front Airbags Work While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest. The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls. The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them. 38 1How the Front Airbags Work After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbag’s surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 39 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Continued Safe Driving ■ When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: Seat belts, and in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags, and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a rollover. ■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. ■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed. 39 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 40 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Advanced Airbags 1Advanced Airbags Safe Driving Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants. The driver’s advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor. Driver’s Seat Position Sensor If the seat is too far forward, the airbag inflates with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact. The passenger’s advanced front airbag system has weight sensors. Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors 40 Although Acura recommends against carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of a child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn off the passenger’s front airbag. If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the driver’s seating position. For both advanced front airbags to work properly: • Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. • Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat. • Make sure any objects are positioned properly on the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors. • All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly. • Do not place any cover over the passenger side dashboard. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 41 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks. Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates. If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger seat. Safe Driving ■ Housing Locations 1Side Airbags Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. Housing Location ■ Operation When inflated When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate. Side Airbag Continued 41 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 42 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags ■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Safe Driving 42 Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. ■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 43 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags ■ Side Airbag Cutoff System 2 Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 47 ■ Side Airbag Off Indicator If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be turned on, and the indicator will go off. Sensors that monitor the passenger’s height. Safe Driving To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when: • The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front passenger seat. • The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the deployment path of the side airbag. When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes on. 1Side Airbag Cutoff System Sensors that monitor the passenger’s position. The sensors that monitor the front passenger’s height and body position may not work if: • The seat-back is wet • The passenger is touching a metal or other electrical conductive object • A seat cushion is on the seat • The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit properly restrained in a rear seat. 43 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 44 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. Safe Driving ■ Housing Locations The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle. Side Curtain Airbag Storage ■ Operation The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a moderate-to-severe side impact. Deployed Side Curtain Airbag ■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision. In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags. 44 1Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags are most effective when an occupant is wearing their seat belt properly and sitting upright, well back in their seat. Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 45 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display. ■ When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly. 3 WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem. Safe Driving ■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator 1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed. Continued 45 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 46 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ■ When the passenger airbag off Safe Driving indicator comes on The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat. 1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Such as: • An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket. • A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back. • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat. • The front seat or seat-back is forced back against Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 49 46 an object on the seat or floor behind it. • An object placed under the front passenger’s seat. Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on. If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on. The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 47 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ Side Airbag Off Indicator 1Side Airbag Off Indicator ■ When the side airbag off indicator Safe Driving comes on This indicator comes on if the passenger’s side airbag has been turned off because the passenger is too small to be sitting in the front seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has leaned into the airbag’s deployment path. When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , the indicator should come on for a few seconds and then go out. If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Unless the passenger is a smaller statured adult or a child, the indicator should go off when the passenger returns to a proper upright sitting position. 47 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 48 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations: Safe Driving ■ When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced. ■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash. ■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an Acura dealer. For U.S. vehicles you can also contact Acura Client Service at 800-382-2238. 48 1Airbag Care We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 49 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under. Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: • An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat. • A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle. • Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat. Continued 3 WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary. Safe Driving To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle. 1Protecting Child Passengers The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/ territories have laws restricting where children may ride. 49 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 50 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers • Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system. Safe Driving • Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision. • Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. • Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. • Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. 50 1Protecting Child Passengers 3 WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death. Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked. To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels. 2 Safety Labels P. 62 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 51 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Infants 1Protecting Infants 3 WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front. Safe Driving An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old. ■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position. Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position. Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation. When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system. 2 Airbags P. 34 If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat. Continued 51 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 52 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Smaller Children Safe Driving If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat. ■ Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position. 1Protecting Smaller Children 3 WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates. If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child. Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child. 52 Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 53 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Selecting a Child Seat 1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple. LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation. Safe Driving Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety. In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions. ■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: • The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. • The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. • The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. Continued 53 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 54 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Safe Driving A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors. 1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks. Marks Lower Anchors Rigid Type 54 2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 55 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Safe Driving For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. Flexible Type Tether Strap Hook Anchor 3. Release the head restraint, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker. 5. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt. 6. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. Continued 55 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 56 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Safe Driving 1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat maker's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks. 3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor. 4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 2 – 4. 5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat. 56 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 57 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Adding Security with a Tether Anchor Fitting 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. Safe Driving 6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt. 7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 1Adding Security with a Tether Two tether anchorage points are provided behind the rear outer seating positions and one in the ceiling for the rear center. A child seat that is installed with a seat belt and comes with a tether can use the tether for additional security. Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available. Tether Anchorage Points Continued 57 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 58 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Tether Strap Hook Safe Driving Anchor Anchor Tether Strap Hook 58 ■ Using an outer anchor 1. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 2. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. 3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. ■ Using the center anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position. 2. Open the anchor cover. 3. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 4. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 59 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safety of Larger Children ■ Protecting Larger Children 1Safety of Larger Children ■ Checking Seat Belt Fit When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions. ■ Checklist • Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat? • Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm? • Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs? • Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat. Continued 3 WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in serious injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates. If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed. Safe Driving The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front. 59 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 60 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children ■ Booster Seats 1Booster Seats Safe Driving If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations. When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly. Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces, and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive. ■ Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: • Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual. • Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. • Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. • Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat. ■ Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly. 60 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 61 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior. • The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. • The exhaust system may have been damaged. • The vehicle is raised for an oil change. When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below. 1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting. 3 WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide. Safe Driving ■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever 1Carbon Monoxide Gas An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine. Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running. 61 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 62 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Safety Labels Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. Safe Driving If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement. Sun Visor Dashboard Doorjambs Radiator Cap 62 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 63 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Instrument Panel This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving. Indicators ............................................ 64 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages...................... 72 Gauges and Multi-Information Display Gauges.............................................. 74 Multi-Information Display .................. 75 63 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 64 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Indicators Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● Instrument Panel Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ● ● ● ● Low Oil Pressure Indicator ● ● Shift Position Indicator 64 Explanation Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released. Come on when the brake fluid level is low. Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system. The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released. ● Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. ● Indicates the current shift lever position. Message Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level. 2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 292 ● Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 If the Brake System Indicator Comes On P. 292 Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place. 2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 290 2 Shifting P. 203 — 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 65 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● ● ● Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems. ● Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer. Message 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 309 ● Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine is not started. If “readiness codes” have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off. Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system. Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s cylinders is detected. Explanation 2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 291 ● Charging System Indicator ● ● Transmission Indicator ● Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on when the battery is not charging. ● Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Blinks if the transmission system has a problem. ● Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption. 2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 290 Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. Continued 65 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 66 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name M (sequential shift mode) Indicator/ Gear Position Indicator ● ● Instrument Panel ● Seat Belt Reminder Indicator ● ● Indicator Low Fuel Indicator ● ● ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Indicator 66 ● On/Blinking Explanation Message Comes on when the manual sequential shift mode is applied. Blinks if the transmission system has a problem. 2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 205 — Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w . If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on about a few seconds later. Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals. ● Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.8 U.S. gal./10.5 Liter left). Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge. ● Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS. ● ● The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts. Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 27 ● Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible. Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. 2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 218 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 67 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● ● ● VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Indicator ● ● ● VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) OFF Indicator ● Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner ● Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Blinks when VSA® is active. Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA® system. ● Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Comes on when you deactivate VSA®. Message Instrument Panel Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Explanation 2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System P. 210 2 VSA® On and Off P. 211 — Continued 67 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 68 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Door and Tailgate Open Indicator ● Instrument Panel ● EPS (Electric Power Steering System) Indicator ● ● ● Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator ● 68 Explanation Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Comes on if the tailgate or any door is not completely closed. ● Goes off if a door or the tailgate is closed. Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS (Electric Power Steering System). ● Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w . Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the tires becomes significantly low. Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS. ● Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary. ● Blinks and remains on - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 If the EPS Indicator Comes On P. 292 Message 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 69 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the multi-information display appears at the same time. Explanation ● ● ● ● Turn Signal Indicators ● ● High Beam Indicator ● ● Lights On Indicator The turn signal indicators blink when you operate the turn signal lever. If you press the hazard warning button, both indicators and all turn signals blink at the same time. ● 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 249, 251 Comes on when the high beam headlights are on. Comes on with reduced brightness when DRL (daytime running lights) are on. Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on. Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately. — ● If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. — Instrument Panel System Message Indicator While the indicator is on, press the (information) button to see the message again. Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the multi-information display. Take the appropriate action for the message. The multi-information display does not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the button is pressed. Message — — — Continued 69 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 70 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Fog Light Indicator ● Instrument Panel Side Airbag Off Indicator ● ● ● Immobilizer System Indicator Comes on when the fog lights are on. Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Comes on when the passenger side airbag system is automatically shut off. ● Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off. Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information. ● ● ● ● ● 70 Explanation Message — — It does not mean there is a problem with your side airbags. Comes on when nobody is sitting in the passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat - Have the passenger sit properly. Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w again. Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur. — 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 71 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking ● Security System Alarm Indicator Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. Explanation Message 2 Security System Alarm P. 99 — Comes on when you press the CRUISE button. 2 Cruise Control P. 207 — Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control. 2 Cruise Control P. 207 — Indicator ● CRUISE CONTROL Indicator ● Instrument Panel CRUISE MAIN Indicator 71 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 72 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the with the system message indicator on. Message Condition ● (information) button to see the message again Explanation Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high. Instrument Panel 2 Overheating P. 288 ● Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed. 2 Tighten Fuel Fill Cap Message P. 291 ● Appears if there is a problem with the DRL system. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Daytime Running Lights P. 108 ● ● 72 Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE PAST DUE follow. 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 232 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 73 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages Message ● Appears when you open the driver’s door while the ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q . ● Appears when the ignition key is turned to ACCESSORY (q from ON (w . (The driver’s door is closed.) Explanation ● Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the key. — ● Appears when you open the driver’s door while the ignition key is in LOCK (0 . ● Remove the key from the ignition switch. ● Appears when there is a problem with the power tailgate system. ● Manually open or close the power tailgate. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. ● Instrument Panel Model with power tailgate Condition 73 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 74 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Gauges and Multi-Information Display Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and temperature gauge. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w . ■ Speedometer Displays your driving speed in mph. Instrument Panel ■ Fuel Gauge Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. 1Fuel Gauge NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter. The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading. ■ Temperature Gauge Displays the temperature of the engine coolant. ■ Tachometer Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute. 74 1Temperature Gauge NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal. 2 Overheating P. 288 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 75 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display Multi-Information Display The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information. ■ Switching the Display (information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change the HFL * Trip Computer Instrument Panel Press the display. Button Engine Oil Life SEL/RESET Button * Not available on all models Odometer Trip B Trip A Outside Temperature : Press the button. : Press the SEL/RESET button. Shown when Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® is activated. Tire Pressure for each tire Continued 75 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 76 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Odometer Shows the total number of miles that your vehicle has accumulated. ■ Trip Meter Instrument Panel 76 Shows the total number of miles driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure 2 separate trips. ■ Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0. 1Trip Meter Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 77 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Outside Temperature 1Outside Temperature Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit. It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized. Use the multi-information display’s customized features to correct the temperature. 2 Customized Features P. 79 ■ Instant Fuel Economy Instrument Panel ■ Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F if the temperature reading seems incorrect. The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h). Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg. ■ Average Fuel Economy 1Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset. You can choose to reset either Trip A or average fuel economy A when you refuel. 2 Customized Features P. 79 ■ Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past. Continued 77 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 78 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Elapsed Time The elapsed time display shows the time during one drive cycle. ■ Average Speed Instrument Panel The display shows the average speed in mph since the last time Trip A was reset. ■ Engine Oil Life Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 231 ■ Tire Pressure Monitor Shows each tire’s pressure. 2 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) P. 212 ■ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Shows your paired cell phone’s information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 175 78 1Elapsed Time You can change the elapsed time reset criteria. 2 Customized Features P. 79 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 79 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Customized Features 1Customized Features To customize other features, press the button. 2 List of customizable options P. 81 2 Example for customization settings P. 83 Use the multi-information display to customize certain features. button for a few seconds while the ignition switch is in Multi-Information Display: Goes to customize settings. Customization is possible when you see the driver’s ID (DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2) on the CHG setting screen. The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The customized settings are recalled every time you unlock the driver’s door with that remote. Instrument Panel ■ How to customize Press and hold the ON (w . When you customize settings: Shift to (P Button: Changes the customize menus and items SEL/RESET button: Enters the selected item Continued Model with power tailgate The power tailgate customized setting applies to both driver’s IDs. It is not possible to have a different setting for each remote transmitter. 79 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 80 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Customization flow Press and hold the button. LANGUAGE SELECTION CHG SETTING SEL/RESET METER SETUP SEL/RESET ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY Instrument Panel TRIP A RESET with REFUEL ELAPSED TIME RESET DEFAULT ALL POSITION SETUP SEL/RESET MEMORY POSITION LINK INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME EXIT LIGHTING SETUP SEL/RESET HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK DOOR SETUP SEL/RESET DOOR LOCK MODE POWER TAILGATE KEYLESS OPEN MODE * KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT SECURITY RELOCK TIMER SEL/RESET 80 * Not available on all models EXIT 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 81 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features Changes the displayed language. ENGLISH*1/FRENCH/SPANISH ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F TRIP A RESET with REFUEL Sets Trip A and the average fuel economy to reset when you refuel. ON/OFF*1 ELAPSED TIME RESET Changes the resetting conditions of the elapsed time. IGN OFF*1/TRIP A/TRIP B MEMORY POSITION LINK Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored setting. ON*1/OFF INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. 60sec/30sec*1/15sec HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door. 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. MAX/HIGH/MID*1/LOW/MIN Instrument Panel LIGHTING SETUP Selectable settings LANGUAGE SELECTION METER SETUP POSITION SETUP Description *1: Default Setting Continued 81 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 82 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display Setup Group Customizable Features Selectable settings Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. OFF/ WITH VEH SPD*1/ SHIFT FROM (P AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes the setting for when the doors and the tailgate unlock automatically. OFF/DRIVER DOOR With SHIFT to (P *1/ ALL DOORS With SHIFT to (P / DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFF/ ALL DOORS With IGN OFF DOOR LOCK MODE Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors and the tailgate to unlock on the first push of the remote. DRIVER DOOR*1/ALL DOORS POWER TAILGATE KEYLESS OPEN MODE * Changes the setting for whether the power tailgate opens when it is locked or unlocked. ANYTIME*1/WHEN UNLOCKED KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash LOCK (2nd push) - The beeper sounds ON*1/OFF SECURITY RELOCK TIMER Changes the time it takes for the doors and the tailgate to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door and the tailgate. 90sec/60sec/30sec*1 Sets/Cancels all the customized settings as default. SET/CANCEL AUTO DOOR LOCK Instrument Panel DOOR SETUP DEFAULT ALL *1: Default Setting 82 Description * Not available on all models 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 83 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display ■ Example for customization settings The steps for changing the TRIP A RESET with REFUEL setting to ON are shown below. The default setting for TRIP A RESET with REFUEL is OFF. 1. Press and hold button until CHG SETTING appears on the display. Instrument Panel 2. Press the SEL/RESET button to go into the METER SETUP group. 3. Press the SEL/RESET button again. u LANGUAGE SELECTION appears first in the display. Continued 83 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 84 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display 4. Press the button until TRIP A RESET with REFUEL appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the Customization setup screen, where you can select ON, OFF, or EXIT. Instrument Panel 5. Press the button and select ON, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The ON setup screen appears, then the display returns to the Customization menu screen. 6. Press the button until EXIT appears in the display, then press the SEL/ RESET button. 7. Repeat step 6 until you return to the normal screen. 84 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 85 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Controls This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving. Setting the Clock ................................ 86 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key Types and Functions .................... 87 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ............................................ 89 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................... 91 Childproof Door Locks ....................... 92 Auto Door Lock/Unlock ...................... 92 Opening and Closing the Tailgate..... 93 Security System .................................. 99 Immobilizer System ............................ 99 Security System Alarm........................ 99 Opening and Closing the Windows ...101 Opening and Closing the Moonroof.. 104 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Ignition Switch................................. 105 Turn Signals ..................................... 106 Light Switches.................................. 106 Fog Lights ........................................ 108 Daytime Running Lights ................... 108 Wipers and Washers ........................ 109 Brightness Control ........................... 111 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button........................................ 112 Adjusting the Mirror ........................ 116 Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 116 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 116 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 118 Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 118 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items ................................................ 127 Interior Lights .................................. 127 Interior Convenience Items .............. 129 Climate Control System ................... 140 Using Automatic Climate Control .... 140 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 143 Driving Position Memory System ...... 113 Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 115 85 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 86 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Setting the Clock Clock Models without navigation system 1Clock You can adjust the time in the clock display, using the CLOCK button. ■ Adjusting the Time Menu Button Controls 12/24 Hour Mode Hour Setting Minute Setting 86 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select CLOCK ADJUST in the display. 3. Press . CLOCK ADJUST appears. 4. Rotate to select the item you want to adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute). Then press . 5. Rotate to make the adjustment. 6. Press to enter your selection. The display returns to CLOCK ADJUST. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to adjust other items. 7. To enter the selection, Rotate and select SET, then press . 8. Press the MENU button to go back to the normal display. You can switch the clock display between 24 hours and 12 hours when in the menu mode. Selector Knob Icon details Rotate to select. Press to enter. To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock display begins to blink, then press the (3 (Reset) button. Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets forward or backward. Example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00 Models with navigation system The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 87 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys: 1Key Types and Functions ■ Retractable Master Keys Model with power tailgate Lock Button Release Button Unlock Button Model without power tailgate Release Button Lock Button Unlock Button The seat automatically moves to the preset position when you unlock the door using the remote transmitter on the master key. 2 Driving Position Memory System P. 113 Panic Button Release Button Press The master key folds up inside the remote transmitter. 1. Press the release button to release the key out from the transmitter. u Make sure to fully extend the key. 2. To close the key, press the release button then push the key inside the transmitter until you hear a click. Continued The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics: • Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity. • Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. • Keep the keys away from liquids. • Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer. Controls Power Tailgate Button Panic Button Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock the doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door. All of the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft. 2 Immobilizer System P. 99 If the key is not fully extended, the immobilizer system may not work properly, and the engine may not start. Avoid contact with the key whenever it extends or retracts. 87 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 88 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions ■ Valet Key 1Valet Key Can be used to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock driver’s door. Controls ■ Key Number Tag When you need to leave a key with a third party, leave the valet key. 1Key Number Tag Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key. Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer. If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer. 88 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 89 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside 1Using the Remote Transmitter ■ Using the Remote Transmitter ■ Locking the doors LED Unlock Button Lock Button Unlock Button Lock Button ■ Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: uSome exterior lights will flash twice, and the driver’s door and fuel fill door unlocks. Twice: uThe remaining doors and the tailgate unlock. Continued If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you press the unlock button. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off immediately. 2 Interior Lights P. 127 Controls LED Press the lock button. Once: uSome exterior lights will flash, all the doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door will lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): uA beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set. Open the door within 30 seconds. If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings. The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch. The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or tailgate is open. If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead. 2 Replacing the Battery P. 269 89 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 90 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key Fully insert the key and turn it. If you are using the master key, make sure it is fully extended. Lock When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all of the other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate. Unlock Controls ■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key ■ Locking the driver’s door Pull the lock tab rearward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door. a b ■ Locking the passenger’s doors Pull the lock tab rearward and close the door. ■ Lockout prevention system The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and any door or the tailgate is open. 90 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key 1Locking a Door Without Using a Key When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors, the tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand before locking the door to prevent it from being locked in the vehicle. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 91 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Using the Lock Tab Lock Tab To Lock 1Using the Lock Tab ■ Locking a door Pull the lock tab rearward. ■ Unlocking a door Push the lock tab forward. To Unlock To Lock Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate. 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch Controls ■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock. When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the master lock switch, all the other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same time. To Unlock Master Door Lock Switch 91 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 92 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. ■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door. 1Childproof Door Locks To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle. ■ When opening the door Controls Open the door using the outside door handle. Unlock Lock Auto Door Lock/Unlock ■ Auto door lock The auto door lock function automatically locks all the doors and the tailgate, and the fuel fill door when the vehicle reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). ■ Auto door unlock When you depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P , the driver’s door automatically unlocks. 92 1Auto Door Lock/Unlock The auto door lock/unlock settings can be customized using the multi-information display. 2 Customized Features P. 79 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 93 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Opening and Closing the Tailgate Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. ■ Opening the tailgate • Open the tailgate all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight. • Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close. 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate 3 WARNING Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury. Make sure everyone is clear before closing the tailgate. Keep the tailgate closed while driving to: uAvoid possible damage. uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. Be careful not to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the gate. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 61 Controls ■ Closing the tailgate When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits their head or closes on their hands. Be especially cautious if children are around. When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned. Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash. 93 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 94 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Open Handle Opening/Closing the Tailgate Using the Tailgate Open Handle When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate is unlocked. Pull the tailgate open handle and lift open the tailgate. Controls Tailgate Open Handle To manually close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from the outside. Inner Handle 94 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 95 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate switch on the driver’s door, or pressing the button on the tailgate. 2 Customized Features P. 79 ■ The power tailgate can be closed when: • The tailgate is fully open. • The shift lever is in (P . • Press and hold the tailgate button on the remote transmitter for about one second. The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions: • You start the engine while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing. • The vehicle is parked on a steep hill. • The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind. • The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice. If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically. If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate. Controls ■ The power tailgate can be opened when: • The tailgate is fully closed. • The shift lever is in (P . • Press and hold the tailgate button on the remote transmitter for about one second. uIf you have changed the power tailgate keyless open mode setting to when unlocked, you need to unlock the tailgate before you press the tailgate button to open it. 1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * Installing aftermarket components other than genuine Acura accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing. Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your luggage in and out. Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle. The beeper sounds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and move the shift lever out of the (P position while the power tailgate is still open, or closing. * Not available on all models Continued 95 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 96 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Remote Transmitter 1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate * To open or close the power tailgate, do the following: Tailgate Button ■ If the power tailgate keyless open mode is in ANYTIME Press and hold the tailgate button for about one second. Controls ■ If the power tailgate keyless open mode is in WHEN UNLOCKED Press the unlock button twice and unlock all doors and the tailgate first. Then, press and hold the tailgate button for about one second. The beeper sounds and some exterior light flash. To reverse direction while the power tailgate is in operation, press the button again. The beeper sounds three times and the tailgate reverses direction. 96 * Not available on all models If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. Three beeps sound. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes. Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate. Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions. 1Remote Transmitter You can change the condition for opening the power tailgate with the multi-information display. 2 Customized Features P. 79 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 97 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Power Tailgate Button Power Tailgate Button To open or close the power tailgate, press the tailgate button in the driver’s door for about one second. The beeper sounds and some exterior lights flash. ■ Power Tailgate Close Button Controls To reverse direction while the power tailgate is in operation, press the button again. The beeper sounds three times and the tailgate reverses direction. 1Power Tailgate Close Button Press the button on the tailgate to close the power tailgate. If you press the button again while the power tailgate is closing, it stops and reverses direction. If you pull the tailgate open handle while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the power tailgate operation stops. Use caution if the tailgate stops in the middle of either operation. It may suddenly swing up or down. Power Tailgate Close Button Continued 97 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 98 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate * ■ Auto-Closer If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically. 1Auto-Closer The auto-closer feature does not activate if you pull the tailgate open handle while the power tailgate is closing. Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching. Controls Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself. ■ Power Tailgate Fail-Safe Mode The power tailgate fail-safe mode detects if there is an extra load on the tailgate (for example, it is covered with snow). If an extra load is detected, the tailgate opens completely then lowers to the closed position. 1Power Tailgate Fail-Safe Mode If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fail-safe mode may activate. Once the power tailgate fail-safe mode activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion. If the power tailgate fail-safe mode constantly activates, consult at a dealer. 98 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 99 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Security System Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key. Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch. • Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch. • Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. • Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition switch. NOTICE Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended. Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. 1Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, or hood are opened without the key, or remote transmitter. It also activates if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w after locking the doors with the remote transmitter. The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system deactivates. Controls Security System Alarm 1Immobilizer System ■ When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and all of the exterior lights flash. ■ To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, or remote transmitter. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, are deactivated. Continued 99 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 100 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: • The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 , and the key has been removed from the ignition switch. • The hood is closed. • All doors and the tailgate are locked with the remote transmitter. ■ When the security system alarm sets Controls The security system indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set. ■ To cancel the security system alarm The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or remote transmitter. The security system indicator goes off at the same time. ■ Panic Mode ■ The panic button on the remote Panic Button transmitter If you press the PANIC button for approximately one second, the following will occur: • The horn sounds. • Some exterior lights flash for about 30 seconds. ■ Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 100 1Security System Alarm Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: • Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master door lock switch. Model with power tailgate • Opening the tailgate with the power tailgate button on the driver’s door. If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter. Do not attempt to alter this system or add another device to it. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 101 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Opening and Closing the Windows Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w , using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all of the windows. The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat. ■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function ■ Automatic operation On Off Power Window Lock Button Driver’s Window Switch Indicator Front Passenger’s Window Switch To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly. The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly. 3 WARNING Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them. The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either front door cancels this function. Controls When the power window lock button is turned on (pushed in, indicator on), you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle. 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction. The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. ■ Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly. To close: Pull the switch up lightly. Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position. Continued 101 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 102 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function Close To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up. Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position. Open Controls ■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter To open: Press the unlock button twice within 10 seconds and hold it down for the second time. If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure. Unlock Button 102 1Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter You cannot operate the power windows with the remote transmitter when the door is open. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 103 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing the Windows/Moonroof with the Key Close Open Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation. You cannot close the power windows with the key when the door is open. Controls To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there. 1Opening/Closing the Windows/Moonroof with the Key 103 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 104 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Opening and Closing the Moonroof ■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w . Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. ■ Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then release. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release. Controls The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly. ■ Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it until the desired position is reached. ■ Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release. 104 1Opening/Closing the Moonroof 3 WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it. NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor. The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either front door cancels this function. When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 105 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Ignition Switch 1Ignition Switch You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P . (0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position. (q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position. (w ON: This is the position when driving. Controls (e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key. If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out. When this happens, the following messages appear on the multi-information display: • In LOCK (0 : REMOVE KEY. • In ACCESSORY (q : REMOVE KEY. The buzzer will stop when you take the key out. If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn. 105 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 106 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals Turn Signals Right Turn The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w . Left Turn Controls Light Switches 1Light Switches If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the light is on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. ■ Manual Operation High Beams Flashing the high beams Low Beams Turns on parking, side marker, tail and license plate lights Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and license plate lights 106 Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the position of the ignition switch. ■ High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. ■ Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. ■ Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it. When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on. 2 Indicators P. 64 Repeatedly turning the headlights on and off reduces the life of the HID headlight bulbs. If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer. Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 107 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches ■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w . We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities. The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly. Light Sensor Controls When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. uYou can change the auto light sensitivity setting. 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) 2 Customized Features P. 79 ■ Automatic lighting off feature The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver’s door. u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 79 Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows: If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position). Sensor Sensitivity More Sensitive Setting MAX Ambient Light at Bright HIGH The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime. MID LOW Less Sensitive MIN Dark 107 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 108 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights Fog Lights When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights. Fog Light Switch Controls Daytime Running Lights The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met: • The ignition switch is in ON (w . • The headlight switch is off, or in • The parking brake is released. . The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch will turn off the daytime running lights. The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on. 108 1Fog Lights When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on. They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on. 2 Indicators P. 64 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 109 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers Wipers and Washers ■ Front Wiper/Washer 1Wipers and Washers The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w . a b Pull to use washer. c d Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring a MIST b OFF c INT: Low speed with intermittent d LO: Low speed wipe e HI: High speed wipe ■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain. ■ Adjusting the delay Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay. Long delay NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield, becoming stuck. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on. Controls e ■ MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever. NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged. If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a single sweep. The wiper operation of the shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same when the vehicle speeds up. Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged. Short delay ■ Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever, the wipers make two or three more sweeps before stopping. Continued 109 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 110 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers ■ Rear Wiper/Washer 1Wipers and Washers The rear wiper and washer can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w . a c c Controls b a ON: Intermittent b OFF c Washer ■ Wiper switch (OFF, ON) The wiper operates intermittently after completing a few sweeps. ■ Washer ( ) Sprays while you rotate the switch to this position. Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, it stops operating after a few more sweeps. ■ Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off. Front Wiper Position INT (Intermittent) LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe) 110 Rear Wiper Operation Intermittent Continuous If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 , then remove the obstacle. The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 111 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control Brightness Control When the parking lights are turned on and the ignition switch is in ON (w , you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left. Control Knob ■ Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the multiinformation display while you are adjusting it. As the brightness level increases to the right, the instrument panel gets brighter. Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on. Pressing either switches the display. (information) button If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the parking lights are on. Controls You will hear the beeper when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. The multiinformation display will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness. 1Brightness Control The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off. 111 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 112 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition is in ON (w . Controls 112 The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, they do not automatically switch off. 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires. This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 113 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System Driving Position Memory System You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions. The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle when you enter. • Driver 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. • Driver 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2. Driver 2 Using the multi-information display, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function. 2 Customized Features P. 79 You can cancel the driving position memory link and customized settings. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons at the same time. The LED in the remote transmitter blinks twice and the default settings are restored. To turn the memory position link settings back on, repeat this procedure. The LED will blink once. Continued Controls Driver 1 1Driving Position Memory System 113 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 114 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System ■ Storing a Position in Memory Memory Button 1 Memory Button 2 Controls Set Button 1. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position, and turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Press the SET button. u You will hear the beeper, and the memory button indicator light will blink. 3. Press memory button (1 or (2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat position has been memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on. ■ Recalling the Stored Position Memory Buttons 1. Move the shift lever to (P . 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ). u You will hear the beeper, and the indicator light will blink. The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear the beeper, and the indicator light stays on. 114 1Storing a Position in Memory After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: • You do not press the memory button within five seconds. • You readjust the seat position before the doublebeep. • You turn the ignition switch to any position except ON (w . 1Recalling the Stored Position The seat will stop moving if you: • Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or (2 ). • Adjust the seat position. • Shift into any position except (P . 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 115 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel 3 WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped. Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving. Controls The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture. 1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. To adjust u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators. 3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever To lock Lever down to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out. 115 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 116 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Adjusting the Mirror Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position. ■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Controls When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. Press the auto button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the auto indicator comes on. Indicator Sensor Auto Button Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w . ■ Mirror position adjustment Selector Switch Adjustment Switch 116 L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror. 1Adjusting the Mirror Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 118 1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R . 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 117 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the MirroruPower Door Mirrors ■ Reverse Tilt Door Mirror If activated, the passenger side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the shift lever in (R ; this improves close-in visibility on the passenger side of the vehicle when backing up. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you shift out of (R . To activate this feature, turn the ignition switch to ON (w and slide the selector switch to the passenger’s side. Controls Selector Switch 117 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 118 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Adjusting the Seats Adjusting the Seat Positions Allow sufficient space. Move back. Controls Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible. ■ Adjusting the front seat 1Adjusting the Seats 3 WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate. Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. Horizontal Position Adjustment Always make seat adjustments before driving. Height Adjustment (Driver’s seat only) Seat-back Angle Adjustment Driver’s seat is shown 118 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 119 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions ■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs 1Adjusting the Seat-Backs Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel. Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. Continued Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat. Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back. Controls The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position. 3 WARNING Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help. 119 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 120 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions ■ Adjusting the Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. Controls Position head in the center of the head restraint. Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should be level with the center height of the restraint. ■ Adjusting the front and rear outer head restraint positions To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restrain: Push it down while pressing the release button. 120 1Adjusting the Head Restraints 3 WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash. Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving. The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active head restraints. 2 Active Head Restraints P. 124 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 121 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions ■ Changing the Center Rear Seat Head Restraint Position ■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints Controls A passenger sitting in the center back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button. 1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints 3 WARNING Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out. To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position. Continued Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash. Always replace the head restraints before driving. 121 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 122 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions ■ Adjusting the Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support The firmness of the seat-back can be adjusted. To make it firmer: Pull the lever backward. To make it less firm: Push the lever forward. Controls 122 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 123 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions ■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position 1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off. Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor. Controls Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. 3 WARNING In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag. Continued 123 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 124 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions ■ Active Head Restraints The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active head restraints. In a rear impact, an occupant properly secured by a seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will move forward. This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupant’s head, which helps reduce the likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine. Controls 124 1Active Head Restraints In order for the active head restraints to operate properly: • Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs. • Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat-back. • Install each restraint in its proper location. After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position. If the restraint does not return to its normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 125 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats Rear Seats ■ Folding Down the Rear Seats 1. Unlatch the detachable anchor from the anchor buckle and store the detachable anchor in the retractor housing. Lever 2. Pull the release lever and fold down the seat-back. If the rear head restraints get caught on the front seat-backs, remove the head restraints. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints P. 121 The rear seat-backs can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the cargo area. Never drive with a seat-back folded down and the tailgate open. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 61 To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning a seat-back to it’s original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide. Controls Anchor Buckle 1Folding Down the Rear Seats Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly. 2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 46 125 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 126 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest Armrest ■ Using the Front Seat Armrest The console lid can be used as an armrest. To adjust: Push the release lever and slide the armrest to a desired position. Release the lever to lock the position. Controls ■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back. 126 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 127 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items Interior Lights ■ Interior Light Switches Door Activated Position Front On Off Door Activated Position On Off ■ ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. ■ Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: • When any of the doors are opened. • You unlock the driver’s door. • You remove the key from the ignition switch. ■ OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. ■ Map Lights The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses. In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations: • When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it. • When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door. You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 79 The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: • When you lock the driver’s door. • When you close the driver’s door with the key in the ignition switch. • When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w . Controls Rear 1Interior Light Switches If you leave any of the doors open without the key in the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes. 1Map Lights When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens. Continued 127 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 128 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights ■ Cargo Area Light ■ ON The light comes on when you open the tailgate, and goes off when closed. On Controls 128 Off ■ OFF The light stays off with or without opening the tailgate. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 129 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Interior Convenience Items ■ Glove Box 1Glove Box Pull the handle to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the master key. To Lock 3 WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Always keep the glove box closed while driving. The glove box light comes on when the parking lights are on. ■ Detachable shelf Controls Glove Box The shelf in the glove box is detachable. To remove it, disengage the tabs. Shelf Continued 129 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 130 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Console Compartment Controls Close Open 130 1Console Compartment Pull the handle to open the console compartment. Use only resealable containers or keep unopened cans in the console compartment. Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery and electrical components in the console compartment. To use the console lid as an armrest, slide it to the desired position while pulling up the release lever. When the heater begins to divert warm air, the airflow into the console compartment is shut off. You can keep beverage bottles and cans cool with the air conditioning system. 1. Turn the dial counterclockwise to open the air vent in the console compartment. 2. Turn on the climate control system and adjust the temperature to cool. 3. Set the mode control or . u The cool air is diverted through the air vent. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 131 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Under-floor Storage Area Lift up the handle and put the lid on the notch. Handle Lid Controls Notch ■ Floor Storage Compartments Strap Strap Hold the strap and raise the lid. Continued 131 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 132 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Side Storage Compartment Located on the side panel in the cargo area. Pull up the handle and remove the lid. Controls 132 Handle 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 133 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Beverage Holders 1Beverage Holders NOTICE ■ Front seat beverage holders Press the raised detent to open the lid. To close the lid, push it down until it latches. Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior. Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you. Push Continued Controls ■ Rear seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders. 133 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 134 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Accessory Power Sockets 1Accessory Power Sockets There are three accessory power sockets; one in the console compartment, one in the front of the center console, and one in the left side panel in the cargo area.They can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w . Controls Open the cover to use it. NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket. NOTICE Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket and compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged. The accessory power socket is designed to supply continuous electrical power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps). To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running. 134 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 135 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Coat Hooks 1Coat Hooks There are coat hooks on the rear left and right grab handles. Pull them down to use them. The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items. Controls Continued 135 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 136 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Cargo Hooks Hooks Use the floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the cargo area. Controls There are also hooks on both sides of the cargo area. Hook 136 1Cargo Hooks NOTICE Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs more than 6lbs (3kg) on the side cargo hooks. Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the hooks. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 137 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Sunglasses Holder 1Sunglasses Holder To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches. Push Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items. You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder. Controls Continued 137 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 138 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Seat Heaters 1Seat Heaters The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting. There is no heater in the passenger’s seatback due to the side airbag cutoff system. Controls 138 While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. uThe appropriate indicator will be on while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the button on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off. When a comfortable temperature is reached, select LO to keep the seat warm. 3 WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off after a period of time. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 139 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Tonneau Cover 1Tonneau Cover The tonneau cover can be used to conceal your parcels and protect them from direct sunlight. Handle Hook ■ To retract: Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll it back until it is completely retracted. Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat in the cargo area. They could block your view and be thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop. To prevent tonneau cover damage: • Do not place items on the tonneau cover. • Do not put weight on the tonneau cover. Controls ■ To extend: Pull the handle on the center edge, then clip the mounting rods in the hooks on both sides of the hatch opening. Do not access parcels in the cargo area while driving. This may cause injury if you have to brake hard. Mounting Rod ■ To remove: Push either end of the housing inward, then lift it out of its position. 139 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 140 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor and back of the vents, and back of center console the center console Floor vents Floor and defroster vents Controls AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button Driver’s Side Temperature Control Switch Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch (Recirculation) Button (Fan Control) Bar Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control switch. 3. Press the ON/OFF button to cancel. ■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. 140 1Using Automatic Climate Control If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically. To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed. Once you have set the desired temperature, do not use the temperature control switches more than necessary. Doing so may delay the time it takes to reach the set temperature. If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down. When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed. Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 141 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Pressing the button turns the air conditioner system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode. Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings. 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. ■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the 2. Press the Controls If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows. 1To rapidly defrost the windows button. button. After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility. 141 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 142 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode Synchronized Mode 1Synchronized Mode When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode. When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately. Controls You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronized mode. 1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to synchronized mode. 2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch. Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode. 142 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 143 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors Automatic Climate Control Sensors Sunlight Sensor Controls Temperature Sensor The automatic climate control system is equipped with a sunlight sensor and an interior temperature sensor. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them. 143 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 144 144 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 145 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Features This chapter describes how to operate technology features on models without the navigation system and HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Audio System About Your Audio System................ 146 USB Adapter Cable .......................... 147 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 148 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 148 Audio System Basic Operation Adjusting the Sound ........................ 150 Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 151 Playing the XM® Radio ..................... 153 Playing a CD .................................... 155 Playing an iPod®............................... 158 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 161 * Not available on all models Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 164 Audio Error Messages CD Player......................................... 166 iPod®/USB Flash Drive....................... 167 Audio Remote Controls.................... 168 General Information on the Audio System XM® Radio Service ........................... 169 Recommended CDs ......................... 170 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Using HFL ........................................ 175 HFL Menus ...................................... 177 Compass * .......................................... 187 Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives... 172 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Training HomeLink........................... 173 145 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 146 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Audio System About Your Audio System On models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for operation of the audio system, AcuraLink *, Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these features. The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service. It can also play CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPods®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth® devices. You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or the remote controls on the steering wheel. 1About Your Audio System XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on XM® Radio, contact a dealer. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 169 XM® Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. Features XM® Radio Remote Control iPod® USB Flash Drive 146 * Not available on all models Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported. iPod® is a registered trademark owned by Apple Inc. MP3 and AAC are standard audio compression formats. WMA is an audio compression format developed by Microsoft Corporation. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 147 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable USB Adapter Cable 1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the adapter cable. 2. Connect the iPod® dock connector or the USB flash drive to the USB connector. 1USB Adapter Cable • Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the • • • • If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/ ipod. Audio Antenna Features • vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it. Do not use an extension cable with the USB adapter cable. Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged. We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle. Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version. 1Audio Antenna Your vehicle is equipped with a removable antenna at the rear of the roof. NOTICE Before using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash, remove the antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This prevents the antenna from being damaged by the car wash brushes. 147 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 148 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack Auxiliary Input Jack Use the jack in the console compartment to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover. 2. Connect a standard audio device to the input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches to the AUX mode. 1Auxiliary Input Jack To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by pressing the AUX button. You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system. State or local laws may limit the circumstances in which you can launch or control your attached audio device. Features Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. ■ Entering the audio security code ENTER CODE appears on the display when the power is reconnected. 1. Turn on the audio system. 2. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code correctly after 10 tries, you need to visit a dealer to have the system reset. 148 1Audio System Theft Protection Find the audio system’s security code and serial number on the radio code card. Do not store the card in your vehicle. If you lose the radio code card, you must obtain the information from a dealer. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 149 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Audio System Basic Operation To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w . Use the selector knob or MENU button to access some audio functions. 1Audio System Basic Operation These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate Press to select. to ENTER. Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions. The extended display has three segments to display detailed information. RETURN Button Selector Knob MENU Button Features Menu Display Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU button: Press to select any setting such as the clock, sound control, or the compass. Press this button again to cancel the menu display mode. RETURN button: Press to go back to the previous display. 149 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 150 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound Press the MENU button, and rotate to adjust the setting. Rotate to scroll through the following choices: Selector MENU Knob Button TREBLE FADER Features BALANCE SUBW FADER is selectable. SVC CLOCK ADJUST 150 When the adjustment level reaches the center, you will see C in the display. The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. BASS RETURN Button 1Adjusting the Sound Subwoofer Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation Clock setting 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 151 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio Playing the AM/FM Radio VOL/ Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. AM/FM Button Press to select a band. Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button. CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an RDS category. SCAN Button Press to sample each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, press the button again. SKIP Bar Press and hold to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. Features TITLE Button Press to switch the RDS name on and off. A.SEL (Auto Select) Button Press to scan both bands and store the strongest station in each preset. To turn off auto select, press the button again. This restores the presets you originally set. Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Continued 151 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 152 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio ■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Playing the AM/FM Radio Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station. ■ RDS INFO ON Press the TITLE button while listening to an RDS capable station. RDS INFO ON appears, and the station name is displayed. ■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category RDS Category 1. Press the CATEGORY bar to display and select an RDS category. 2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station. The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. Switching the Audio Mode Press the MODE button on the steering wheel. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 168 You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each. Features A.SEL function scans and stores up to six AM stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal in the preset buttons. If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies in the preset buttons manually. 1Radio Data System (RDS) The display shows up to 31 characters of text data. Press and hold the TITLE button to see additional characters. indicates that the text data continues. The display goes back to the previous screen if you press and hold the button again. 152 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 153 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio Playing the XM® Radio (XM®) Button Press to select XM® Radio. TITLE Button Press and release to cycle the display between the name, title, and category. VOL/ Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. CATEGORY Bar Press either side to display and select an XM® Radio category. SKIP Bar Press to skip to the previous or next channel. SCAN Button Press to sample all channels (in the channel mode), or channels within a category (in the category mode). Each sampling continues for a few seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and continue listening to the channel. MENU Button Press to display the menu items. Features Preset Buttons (1-6) To store the channel: 1. Select the channel. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select XM, then press the preset button. Selector Knob Turn to select channels. Continued 153 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 154 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio ■ To Play the XM® Radio 1Playing the XM® Radio 1. Press the button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2). 2. Press and hold the TITLE button to switch between the channel mode and category mode. If you press the MENU button, rotate to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE CHANNEL. Each time you press , the mode switches between them. Press the button to enter the setting. 3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or Preset buttons. Features ■ To Select a Channel from a List 1. Press to display a channel list. 2. Rotate to select a channel, then press . Channel list is shown. 154 In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.). You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations each. There may be instances when XM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 155 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button. Knob VOL/ Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. TITLE Button Press to display the text data on a CD (if it was recorded with text data). CD Button Press to play a CD. CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot. CATEGORY Bar Press to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3 or WMA. SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each song. ● Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3 or WMA). ● Press two times to sample the first file in each of the main folders (MP3 or WMA). ● To turn off scan, press and hold the button. Features (CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD. SKIP Bar Press or to change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA). MENU Button Press to display menu items (if available). Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/files. Turn to select an item, then press ENTER to set your selection. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display. Continued 155 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 156 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD ■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob (MP3/WMA) 1Playing a CD NOTICE 1. Press to switch the display to a folder list. Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit. WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file. Folder Selection Features Track Selection 2. Rotate to select a folder. 3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a file, then press . Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: • When you select a new folder, file, or track. • When you change the audio mode to CD. • When you insert a CD. The display shows up to 31 characters of text data. Press and hold the TITLE button to see additional characters. indicates that the text data continues. The display goes back to the previous screen if you press and hold the button again. If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds. 156 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 157 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD ■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous display, and press the MENU button to cancel this setting mode. You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or files. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press . Features Play Mode Items Play Mode Menu Items NORMAL PLAY REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track/ file(s). REPEAT ONE FLD MP3/WMA : Repeats all files in the current folder. RANDOM IN DISC: Plays all tracks/files in random order. RANDOM IN FLD MP3/WMA : Plays all files in the current folder in random order. SCAN TRK: Samples all tracks on the CD. MP3/WMA : Samples all files in the current folder. SCAN FLD MP3/WMA : Samples the first file in each folder. ■ To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press . 3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press . 157 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 158 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod® Playing an iPod® Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button. 2 USB Adapter Cable P. 147 VOL/ Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. AUX Button Press to select iPod® (if connected). Features TITLE Button Press to display the text data. SKIP Bar Press or to change songs. MENU Button Press to display menu items. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display. 158 Selector Knob Turn to select a song, file, menu item, or play mode. Press ENTER to set your selection. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 159 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod® ■ How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu 1. Press 1Playing an iPod® to display the iPod® menu. Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio display. 2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 167 iPod® Menu: Playlists, Artists, Albums, and Songs 2. Rotate to select a menu. Features 3. Press to display the items on that menu. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . Continued 159 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 160 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod® ■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items NORMAL PLAY SHUFFLE OFF: Turns off the shuffle mode. REPEAT OFF: Turns off the repeat mode. REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track. SHUFFLE ALL: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. SHUFFLE ALBUM: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, or songs) in random order. You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press . Features Play Mode Items 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press ■ To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press . 3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press 160 . . 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 161 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button. 2 USB Adapter Cable P. 147 VOL/ Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected). CATEGORY Bar Press to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder. SCAN Button You will get a 10-second sampling of each file. ● Press to sample all files in the current folder. ● Press two times to sample the first file in each of the main folders. ● To turn off scan, press and hold the button. SKIP Bar Press or Features TITLE Button Press to display the text data. to change files. MENU Button Press to display menu items. Selector Knob Turn to select a file, then press ENTER set your selection. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display. *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this audio unit. Continued 161 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 162 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob 1. Press Folder Selection to switch the display to a folder list. 1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 169 Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played. The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file. 2. Rotate to select a folder. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio display. 2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 167 Features 162 Track Selection 3. Press to change the display to a list of files in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a file, then press . 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 163 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items NORMAL PLAY REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current file. REPEAT ONE FLD: Repeats all files in the current folder. RANDOM IN FLD: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. RANDOM ALL: Plays all files in random order. SCAN TRK: Samples all files in the current folder. SCAN FLD: Samples the first file in each folder. You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file(s). 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press . Features Play Mode Items 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press . ■ To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press . 3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press . 163 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 164 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 179 VOL/ Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Features SKIP Bar Press or change files. Selector Knob Turn to change files. Turn to select an item, then press ENTER to set your selection. Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by calling the HandsFreeLink® consumer support at 1-888-5287876. In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play. TITLE Button Press to confirm the device name. RETURN Button Press to go back to the previous display. 164 AUX Button Press to select Bluetooth® Audio. 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio MENU Button Press to display menu items. to 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 165 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is linked to HFL. 2. Press the AUX button. Check the following if the phone is not recognized: Another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, is already linked. ■ Switching to HFL Button To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions. The pause function may not be available on some phones. If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack, you may need to press the AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system. Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. 1Switching to HFL Press the (HFL Talk) button on the steering wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio is playing. Features ■ To pause or resume a file 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select RESUME/PAUSE, then press . Each time you press , the setting switches between PAUSE and RESUME. 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 175 Press the (HFL Back) button to end the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio. Button 165 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 166 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Audio Error Messages CD Player If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages. Error Message Cause HEAT ERROR High temperature UNSUPPORTED Track/file format not supported BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL PUSH EJECT Solution Features ● Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message is cleared. ● Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays automatically. ● Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the error message is cleared. Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the disc again. ● Mechanical error 2 Protecting CDs P. 171 MECH ERROR ● CHECK DISK LOAD ● 166 BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL Servo error CHECK DISC Disc error ● ● If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, contact your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player. Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed. 2 Protecting CDs P. 171 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 167 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive iPod®/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Solution There is a problem with the USB adapter unit. BAD USB DEVICE PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL An incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. iPod NO SONG Appears when the iPod® is empty. UNSUPPORTED VER. Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected, update the iPod® software to the newer version. CONNECT RETRY Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®. UNPLAYABLE FILE Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song. USB NO SONG Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive. UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when the supported device is connected, reconnect the device. Features USB ERROR 167 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 168 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Audio Remote Controls Allows you to operate the audio system while driving. MODE Button MODE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FM1 FM2 AM XM1 XM2 CD AUX VOL (Volume) Button Features 168 CH (Channel) Button VOL Button Press : Increases the volume Press : Decreases the volume CH Button • When listening to radio Press (+ : Selects the next preset radio station. Press (- : Selects the previous preset radio station. • When listening to a CD, USB flash drive or iPod®, or Bluetooth® audio Press (+ : Skips to the next song. Press (- : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song. 1Audio Remote Controls The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded. When in the AUX mode, the following are operable from the remote controls: • iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB adapter cable • Bluetooth® audio (with some phones only) 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 169 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 General Information on the Audio System XM® Radio Service ■ Subscribing to XM® Radio 1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears. 2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM® website to subscribe. ■ Receiving XM® Radio Press the (XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception. LOADING: XM® is loading the audio or program information. OFF AIR: The channel is not currently broadcasting. UPDATING: The encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and 1 still work normally. NO SIGNAL: The signal is too weak in the current location. --------: No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or title information is unavailable. ANTENNA: There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer. Contact Information for XM® Radio: US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 8529696 1Receiving XM® Radio The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: • In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle. • In tunnels • On the lower level of a multi-tiered road • Large items carried on the roof rack Features ■ XM® Radio Display Messages 1Subscribing to XM® Radio 169 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 170 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs Recommended CDs • Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. • Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. • Play only standard round shaped CDs. The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks. ■ CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files Features 170 • Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. • Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported. 1Recommended CDs A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 171 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs ■ Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: • Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. • When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. • Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. • Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. • Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. • Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. • Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD. 1Protecting CDs NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit. Examples: ● Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs Bubbled/ Wrinkled ● Using Printer Label Kit Sealed With Plastic Ring ● Poor Damaged CDs quality CDs Chipped/ Cracked Small CDs Warped Features ● With Label/ Sticker Burrs 3-inch (8-cm) CD 171 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 172 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives ■ iPod® Model Compatibility Model 1iPod® Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions of these devices. iPod classic® 80GB/160GB iPod classic® 120GB iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod® (5th generation) iPod nano® iPod touch® ■ USB Flash Drives Features 172 • • • • • Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported. 1USB Flash Drives Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 173 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems. ■ Important Safety Precautions Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer. 1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls., Inc. Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it. Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage. Features When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path. Training HomeLink Red Indicator If you have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes. To do this: • Press and hold the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1. • If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1. Continued 173 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 174 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuHomeLink® Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink ■ Training a Button 1Training HomeLink 1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3-8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs? YES 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink. NO NO 3. Features Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work? YES Training Complete 5. YES Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink button at the same time. Then, while continuing to hold the HomeLink button, press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Dose the LED blink within 20 secs? NO 4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. HomeLink LED is on. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate. Training Complete 174 a. Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure: HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs, then remains on. a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn’’ button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener). b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs. Standard transmitter Rolling code transmitter Indicator remains on for about 25 secs. Indicator blinks rapidly for two secs, then remains on for about 23 secs. 2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.” Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle. If you have any problems, see the device’s instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 175 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with navigation system 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for how to operate Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. Models without navigation system Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: • U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call (888) 528-7876. Voice control tips: • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the Using HFL windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone. ■ HFL Buttons • Press and release the • • • (HFL Talk) Button (HFL Back) Button Audio Remote VOL (Volume) Buttons Features • button before giving a command. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. A command that consists of several words can be spoken together. For example, say “Call 123-4567890” at once. When HFL is in use, navigation voice commands cannot be recognized. To change the volume level, use the audio system’s volume knob or the remote audio controls. Microphone (HFL Talk) Button: Press to give a command or answer a call. (HFL Back) Button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command. Continued 175 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 176 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ Help Features 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® • To hear general HFL information and help, say “Tutorial.” • Say “Hands free help” or “Help” any time to get help or hear a list of commands. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® name and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt Bluetooth® Audio when it is playing. Audio will resume when the call is ended. Features ■ Information Display Signal Strength HFL Mode Roam Status 176 Battery Level Status Phone Number 1Information Display The multi-information display notifies you when there is an incoming call. The information that appears on the multiinformation display varies between phone models. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 177 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL. To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. Press the (HFL Talk) button each time you give a command “Phone setup” Pair a phone to the system. “Edit” Edit the name of a paired phone. “Delete” Delete a paired phone from the system. “List” Hear a list of all phones paired to the system. “Status” Hear which paired phone is linked, and its remaining battery life. “Next phone” Search for another phone that has been paired. “Set pairing code” Set the pairing code to either “Fixed” or “Random.” e.g.: “123-456-####” Say a phone number. e.g.: “Jim Smith” Say a name after a phonebook entry is stored. “Redial” Redial the last number called. “Transfer” Transfer a call from HFL to your phone or from your phone to HFL. “Mute” Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call. “Send” Send numbers or names during a call. Continued Features “Call”/“Dial” “Pair” 177 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 178 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus “Phonebook” Features 178 “System setup” “Store” Store a phonebook entry. “Edit” Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry. “Delete” Delete a phonebook entry. “List” Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries. “Receive contact” * Transfer contacts from your phone to HFL. “Security” Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key cycle to access the system. “Change passcode” Change your security passcode. “Call notification” Set how you want to be notified of an incoming call. “Auto transfer” Set to automatically transfer calls from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. “Clear” Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security passcode. “Tutorial” Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system. “Hands-free help” Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command. * Not available on all models 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 179 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup ■ To pair a cell phone 1. If no phone has been paired to the system before, HFL gives you information about how to pair the first phone. If a phone has already been paired: say “Phone Setup” and “Pair” after the HFL prompts. 2. Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode. u HFL gives you a four-digit code and begins searching for your phone. 3. When your phone finds a Bluetooth® device, select HFL from the options and enter the four-digit code. 4. Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone. Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Your phone must be in the discovery or search mode when pairing the phone. Refer to your phone’s manual. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle. Features ■ To rename a paired phone 1. Say “Phone Setup.” 2. Say “Edit” after the prompts. 3. Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone. u If there is more than one phone paired to the system, HFL will ask you which phone’s name you want to change. Press the button and wait for a beep before giving a command. ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Say “Phone Setup.” 2. Say “Delete” after the prompts. 3. Follow the HFL prompts. u HFL will ask you which phone you want to delete. Continued 179 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 180 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To hear the name of all paired phones If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is linked again. ■ To hear which paired phone is currently linked The “Status” and “Next Phone” commands use: Only one paired phone at a time can be linked to HFL. When there are two or more paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone that the system finds is linked. 1. Say “Phone Setup.” 2. Say “Status” after the prompts. 3. HFL will tell you which phone is linked with the system. ■ To change the currently linked phone Features 1. Say “Phone Setup.” 2. Say “Next Phone” after the prompts. 3. HFL disconnects the current phone, and searches for another paired phone. 4. Once another phone is found, it is connected to the system. HFL will inform you which phone is now linked. ■ To change the pairing code setting 1. Say “Phone Setup.” 2. Say “Set Pairing Code” after the prompts. 3. If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone, say “Random.” If you want to create your own four-digit code, say “Fixed.” 4. Follow the HFL prompts. 180 1Phone Setup 1. Say “Phone Setup.” 2. Say “List” after the prompts. 3. HFL reads out all the paired phones’ names. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 181 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a Call 1Making a Call You can make calls using any phone number or a name in the HFL phonebook, and redial the last number called. Press the button and wait for a beep before giving a command. ■ Direct dialing a phone number HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, with has a maximum range of about 30 feet (10 meters). 1. Say “Call” or “Dial.” 2. Say the number you want to dial after the prompts. 3. Say “Call” or “Dial” after the prompts. HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch. However, this may weaken the vehicle’s battery. Features ■ From the HFL phonebook 1. Say “Call” or “Dial.“ 2. Say the name stored in the HFL phonebook after the prompts. 3. Follow the HFL prompts. ■ To redial the last number called by HFL Say “Redial.” ■ To end a call Press the (HFL back) button. Continued 181 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 182 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call Press the button to answer the call, or the button to hang up. When there is an incoming call, a call notification (if activated) sounds and a message appears on the display. Press the call. ■ Transferring a Call button again to return to the original You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL. Press the button and say “Transfer.” Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. ■ Muting a Call Press the button if you want to hang up the original and answer the incoming call. Features To mute or unmute your voice during a call, press and release the say “Mute.” button and ■ Sending Numbers or Names During a Call You can send numbers and names during a call. This is useful when calling a menudriven phone system. ■ To send a number or name during a call 1. Say “Send.” 2. Say the number or name you want to send after the prompts. 3. Follow the HFL prompts. 182 Call Waiting Press the button and put the original call on hold to answer the incoming call. 1Sending Numbers or Names During a Call Press the button before a command. To send a # , say “Pound.” To send a * , say “Star.” 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 183 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ HFL Phonebook 1HFL Phonebook You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers in HFL. The numbers you store can be account numbers or passwords. These numbers can be sent to an automated phone system. • Avoid using duplicate name entries. • Avoid using “home” as a name entry. • It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or longer name. For example, use “Peter” instead of “Pete,” or “John Smith” instead of “John.” ■ To store a phonebook entry 1. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Store” after the prompts. 3. Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry. 4. Say the number you want to store for the name entry. 5. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry. Continued Features ■ To edit the number stored for a name 1. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Edit” after the prompts. 3. Say a name you want to edit. When asked, say the new number for that name. 4. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry. 183 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 184 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a name 1. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Delete” after the prompts. 3. Say a name you want to delete. 4. Say “Yes,” and follow the HFL prompts. ■ To list all names in the phonebook 1. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “List” after the prompts. 3. HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored. 4. When you hear a name you want to call, say “Call.” Features 184 ■ To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly to the HFL phonebook * 1. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Receive Contact” after the prompts. 3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a number from your cell phone, and send it to HFL. u If it is not the number you want to store, say “Discard.” 4. Say the name for that number. 5. Follow the HFL prompts to continue. * Not available on all models 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 185 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ System Setup 1System Setup This command group allows you to change or customize HFL basic settings. Press the button before a command. Once a passcode is set, you are required to enter the passcode with every new key cycle to use HFL. If you forget the code, go to your dealer to have the passcode reset. You can also cancel the passcode by clearing all the data stored in the HFL system. 2 To clear the system P. 186 ■ To set a four-digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security 1. Say “System Setup.” 2. Say “Security.” 3. Follow the HFL prompts and say the four-digit number of your choice. 4. Follow the HFL prompts and confirm the number. The default setting of the incoming notification is a ring tone. ■ To change the security passcode Features 1. Say “System Setup.” 2. Say “Change Passcode” after the prompts. 3. Say the new four-digit passcode after the HFL prompts. 4. Follow the HFL prompts. ■ To select a ring tone or a prompt as the incoming call notification 1. Say “System Setup.” 2. Say “Call Notification” after the prompts. 3. Say “Ring Tone” or “Prompt” after the prompts. For no audible notification, say “Off.” Continued 185 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 186 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function The call on your cell phone can be automatically transferred to HFL when you get into the vehicle and turn on the ignition. 1. Say “System Setup.” 2. Say “Auto Transfer” after the prompts. HFL lets you know the current status. 3. Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting. ■ To clear the system Features 186 Paired phones, all stored or imported phonebook data, and any passcodes are erased. 1. Say “System Setup.” 2. Say “Clear” after the prompts. 3. Follow the HFL prompts. 1System Setup Press the button before a command. You can clear the system when you have forgotten the passcode and cannot access HFL. When HFL asks you for the passcode, say “System Clear.” 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 187 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Compass * When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears. Compass Calibration Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions: • Driving near power lines or stations • Crossing a bridge • Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large object that can cause a magnetic disturbance • When accessories such as antennas and roof racks are mounted by magnets 1Compass Calibration Calibrate the compass in an open area. Compass Setting Menu Items 4. When the display changes to PUSH CAL START, press . 5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off. * Not available on all models While setting the compass: • The RETURN button returns to the previous screen. • The MENU button cancels the setting mode. Features If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Press and hold the MENU button until the display shows the compass setting menu list. 3. Rotate to select CALIBRATION, then press . 1Compass * 187 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 188 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection Compass Zone Selection 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Press and hold the MENU button until the display shows the compass setting menu list. 3. Rotate to select ZONE, then press . The display shows the current zone number. 4. Rotate to select the zone number of your area (See Zone Map), then press . Zone Number Zone Map Features 1 15 14 2 3 13 12 4 11 5 6 7 Guam Island: Zone 8 Puerto Rico: Zone 11 188 8 9 10 1Compass Zone Selection The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north. If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 189 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Driving This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories. Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 190 Maximum Load Limit........................ 193 Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation.......................... 195 Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 197 Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 198 When Driving Starting the Engine .......................... 199 Precautions While Driving................. 201 Automatic Transmission ................... 202 Shifting ............................................ 203 Cruise Control ................................. 207 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 210 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 212 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation........... 214 Braking Brake System ................................... 216 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 218 Brake Assist System.......................... 219 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped................................. 220 Parking ............................................ 220 Refueling Fuel Information .............................. 221 How to Refuel ................................. 222 Fuel Economy.................................... 224 Improving Fuel Economy.................. 224 Accessories and Modifications Accessories ...................................... 225 Modifications................................... 225 189 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 190 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Before Driving Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving. ■ Exterior Checks • Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components. • Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked. • Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear. Driving 190 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 259 • Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside. 1Exterior Checks NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in the hole. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 191 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation ■ Interior Checks 1Interior Checks • Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 193 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 91 • Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too. Driving • Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking. • Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving. • If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur. • Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 118 2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 120 • Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position. 2 Adjusting the Mirror P. 116 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 115 Continued 191 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 192 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation • Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. • Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 29 • Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated. 2 Indicators P. 64 Driving 192 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 193 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb. 1Maximum Load Limit 3 WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Label Example Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual. This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - Continued Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle. 2 Specifications P. 304 Driving (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load. 2 Specifications P. 304 193 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 194 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. Load Limits Example Driving Example1 Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg) Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg) Example2 194 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 195 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation ■ Towing Load Limits 1Towing Load Limits Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving. ■ Total trailer weight Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain. Total Load Continued Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive. Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the tongue load. Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km). Driving Tongue Load ■ Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight. • Excessive tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway. • To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. Readjust the load as needed. 3 WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information 2 Vehicle Specifications P. 304 195 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 196 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation ■ Towing Equipment and Accessories Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing. ■ Hitches The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody. ■ Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. ■ Trailer brakes Driving There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard. ■ Additional towing equipment Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way. ■ Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow. 196 1Towing Equipment and Accessories Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations. Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation. The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 197 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer Driving Safely with a Trailer ■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer 1Driving Safely with a Trailer • Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. • Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits. Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires. 2 Towing Load Limits P. 195 • Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. • Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while driving. • Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. • Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare. ■ Towing Speeds and Gears Driving • Drive slower than normal. • Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. • Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads. ■ Turning and Braking • Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. • Allow more time and distance for braking. • Do not brake or turn suddenly. Continued 197 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 198 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle ■ Driving in Hilly Terrain • Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the air conditioning and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary. • Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently. 1Driving in Hilly Terrain If you use the paddle shifters when driving uphill and downhill, select 3rd, 2nd, or 1st gear, depending on the vehicle speed and road conditions. Do not use 4th and 5th gears. Gear Position 1st 2nd,3rd Speed Range 0 - 42 mph (0 - 67 km/h) 19 - 62 mph (30 - 100 km/h) If the automatic transmission fluid temperature exceeds the specified limit, the transmission will also automatically downshift to the 1st gear, even in the sequential shift mode. The gear position indicator blinks for a few seconds, then stays on. Towing Your Vehicle Driving 198 Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information. 2 Emergency Towing P. 299 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 199 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 When Driving Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 1Starting the Engine Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine. The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters). Brake Pedal 2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N , it is safer to start it in (P . If exhaust sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system. Driving Continued When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain. 199 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 200 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine 3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal. ■ Starting to Drive 1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the brake system indicator has gone off. 2 Parking Brake P. 216 Driving 200 2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. 1Starting the Engine Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15 seconds. • If the engine does not start right away, wait for at least 10 seconds before trying again. • If the engine starts, but then immediately stops, wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled. 2 Immobilizer System P. 99 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 201 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving Precautions While Driving ■ In Rain Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or cause electrical component failure. ■ Other Precautions If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks. 1Precautions While Driving NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission. If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle. Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance. During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain. Driving Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brakes are replaced. 201 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 202 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission Automatic Transmission ■ Creeping The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and increase creeping: • Immediately after the engine starts. • When the climate control system is in use. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped. ■ Kickdown Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves. Driving 202 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 203 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. 1Shifting You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P . ■ Shift lever positions Park Used when parking or starting the engine The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake. Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Used when idling Driving Drive Used for: ● Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 5th automatically) ● Temporarily driving in the sequential mode Drive (S) Used for: ● Automatically changing gears between 1st and 4th (4th gear is used only at high speed) ● Driving in the sequential mode Continued 203 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 204 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Shift Lever Operation 1Shift Lever Operation NOTICE Tachometer’s red zone Shift Lever Position Indicator M (Sequential Shift mode) Indicator/ Gear Position Indicator Driving Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button and shift. 204 When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission. Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away. Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving, a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission problem. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible. The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt. It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 205 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Sequential Shift Mode Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 5th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift mode. ■ When the shift lever is in (D : The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position indicator will come on. Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off. Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive. ■ When the shift lever is in (S : Continued Driving The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the (M (sequential shift) indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. It will not automatically shift up, even if vehicle speed increases. You can only pull away in 1st or 2nd gear. When switching out of the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D . When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the sequential shift mode indicator and shift indicator go off. 205 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 206 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Second gear lock mode If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads. To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever from (S to (D . ■ Sequential Shift Mode Operation (- Paddle Shifter (Shift down) 1Sequential Shift Mode Operation (+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) Driving Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel economy and effective emission control. Shift Up 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter. (Changes to a lower gear) 206 Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change. To change gears continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear. Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to a higher gear) Normal Acceleration 15 mph (24 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 40 mph (64 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h) If the gear position indicator blinks when you try to shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 207 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control Cruise Control Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration. 3 WARNING Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash. When to use ■ Vehicle speed for cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~ ■ Shift positions for cruise control: In (D or (S , in 2nd gear or higher 1Cruise Control Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you. Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather. It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill. How to use Cruise control is ready to use. the steering wheel. Continued Driving ■ Press the CRUISE button on CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel. 207 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 208 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1To Set the Vehicle Speed DECEL/SET Button When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button. On On Press and Release On when cruise control begins. Driving Press the DECEL/SET button when you reach the desired speed using the accelerator pedal. The moment you release the DECEL/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. ■ To Cancel CRUISE Button CANCEL Button 208 1To Cancel To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the CRUISE button. • Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off. Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/ ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. You cannot set or resume in the following situations: • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) • When the CRUISE button is turned off At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 209 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the accelerator and brake pedals, and set the vehicle speed with the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel. To decrease speed To increase speed Decrease vehicle speed with the brake pedal, then take your foot off the brake pedal. Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed. Vehicle speed can be increased or decreased also using the RES/ACCEL or DECEL/SET buttons on the steering wheel. RES/ACCEL Button • Each time you press the button, vehicle speed is increased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • If you keep it pressed, vehicle speed increases until you release it. This speed is then set. DECEL/SET Button • Each time you press it, vehicle speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • If you keep it pressed, vehicle speed decreases until you release it. This speed is then set. Driving DECEL/SET Button Press and Release The vehicle speed is set when the button is released. 209 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 210 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes. ■ VSA® Operation When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink. Driving 210 VSA® System Indicator 1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety. The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 211 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System ■ VSA® On and Off This button is on the driver side control panel. To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep. VSA® OFF Indicator VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on. To turn it on again, press the button until you hear a beep. (VSA® OFF) VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. 1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA® traction and stability enhancement. In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off. When the VSA® system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on. Driving Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control systems switched off. If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing the button. You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal. 211 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 212 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the multi-information display. 1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ■ Tire Pressure Monitor 1Tire Pressure Monitor To select the tire pressure monitor, turn the ignition switch to ON (w and press the (information) button until you see the tire pressure screen. Driving If all the tire pressures are normal, TIRE PRESSURE OK will be displayed. The pressure displayed on the multi-information display can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the multi-information display do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer. SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR may appear if there is a problem with the TPMS. To display the pressure of all four tires, press the SEL/RESET button. The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI. 212 Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. 2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 293 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 213 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) If any tire has low pressure, LOW TIRE PRESSURE is displayed on the multiinformation display. Check the pressure of each tire by pressing the SEL/RESET button. 1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Tire pressure checked and inflated in: • Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather. • Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation. CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a tire has significantly low pressure. The specific tire is displayed on the screen. Driving 213 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 214 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Driving when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 214 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 215 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 215 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 216 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Braking Brake System ■ Parking Brake 1Parking Brake Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Pull the lever fully up without pressing the release button. NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied. If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears on the multi-information display. Always apply the parking brake when parking. Driving 216 To release: 1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold the release button. 2. Lower the lever down all the way, then release the button. To prevent the parking brake from freezing when the outside temperature is extremely cold, do not apply it, but do the following: Put the shift lever in (P , then use a block or other wheel chock to stop the wheels from turning. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 217 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBrakinguBrake System ■ Foot Brake Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. 2 Brake Assist System P. 219 2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 218 1Foot Brake Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times. If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear. Driving Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you. 217 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 218 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ■ ABS Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you. The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.” ■ ABS operation Driving The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. 1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size. When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking. In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS: • When driving on rough road surfaces, including when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow. • When tire chains are installed. You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal. 218 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 219 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBrakinguBrake Assist System Brake Assist System ■ Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. ■ Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down. Driving 219 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 220 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped 1. Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. 2. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if parked on an incline. 1Parking Your Vehicle Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire. 1When Stopped NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: • Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. • Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal. • Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle stops completely. Driving Parking 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D . 2. Apply the parking brake while holding the brake pedal down. 3. Move the shift lever to (P . 4. Turn off the engine. 220 1Parking Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 221 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Refueling Fuel Information ■ Fuel recommendation 1Fuel Information Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher NOTICE Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage. ■ Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Acura endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Driving Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system. We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend, the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available. For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit My Acura at owners.acura.com for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. Continued 221 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 222 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel ■ Gasoline containing ethanol Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline. ■ Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 liters) How to Refuel To Lock Driving To Unlock Master Door Lock Switch 222 1How to Refuel 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear. 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Unlock the driver’s door using the master door lock switch. u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the vehicle will unlock. 3 WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. • Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. • Handle fuel only outdoors. • Wipe up spills immediately. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 223 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel Fuel Fill Door 4. Press the area indicated by the arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click. Press 1How to Refuel Use the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door. The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the driver’s door. NOTICE 5. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap. The fuel fill door and its latching mechanism can be permanently damaged if the fuel fill door is forced closed when the driver’s door is locked. The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature. Cap Holder 6. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 7. Insert the filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature. 8. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand. Driving Cap If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer. Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity. 223 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 224 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Fuel Economy Improving Fuel Economy Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle. ■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the multi-information display. • Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal. • Maintain the specified tire pressure. • Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. • Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance. Driving 224 1Improving Fuel Economy Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving. Miles driven Gallons of fuel Miles per Gallon 100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 225 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Accessories and Modifications Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: • Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions. • Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags. • Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle. 2 Fuses P. 294 • Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation. 1Accessories and Modifications 3 WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications. Acura Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle. Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Acura components that can affect its handling, stability, and reliability. Driving Modifications Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations. 225 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 226 226 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 227 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Maintenance This chapter discusses basic maintenance. Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 228 Safety When Performing Maintenance...229 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 230 Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 231 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 235 Opening the Hood ........................... 236 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 237 Oil Check ......................................... 238 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 239 Engine Coolant ................................ 242 Transmission Fluid............................ 244 Brake Fluid....................................... 245 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 246 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 247 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 255 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 259 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 260 Tire Labeling .................................... 260 DOT Tire Quality Grading ................. 262 Wear Indicators ............................... 264 Tire Service Life................................ 264 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 265 Tire Rotation.................................... 266 Winter Tires ..................................... 267 Battery............................................... 268 Remote Transmitter Care................. 269 Replacing the Battery....................... 269 Climate Control System Maintenance ..270 Cleaning Interior Care .................................... 271 Exterior Care.................................... 273 227 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 228 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and inspection information. ■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance ■ Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling. ■ Periodic inspections • Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly. 2 Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 244 • Check the brake fluid level monthly. 2 Brake Fluid P. 245 Maintenance • Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 259 • Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 247 • Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 255 228 1Inspection and Maintenance Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards. According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi-information display. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 233 If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, purchase the service manual. 2 Authorized Manuals P. 313 If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 229 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task. ■ Maintenance Safety • To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts. • To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline. • Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air. • Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation. ■ Vehicle Safety 3 WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual. 3 WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual. Maintenance • The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off. • Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts. • Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. 1Safety When Performing Maintenance 229 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 230 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Acura genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Acura genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Acura vehicles. Maintenance 230 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 231 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Maintenance MinderTM If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the multi-information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w . The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services. ■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life 1Displaying the Engine Oil Life 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Press the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the multi-information display. Maintenance Service Items Remaining Engine Oil Life The system message indicator ( message. Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0 Maintenance SEL/RESET Button Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage. ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder Continued 231 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 232 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance MinderTM u ■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display Maintenance 232 Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information SERVICE DUE SOON 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Once you switch the display by pressing the (Information) button this message will go off. The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon. SERVICE DUE NOW 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 percent. Press the button to switch to another display. The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible. SERVICE PAST DUE Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be distance appears after driving over 10 inspected and serviced immediately. miles. Press the button to switch to another display. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 233 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance MinderTM u ■ Maintenance Service Items System Message Indicator 1Maintenance Service Items • Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. • Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 Maintenance Minder Message km). • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. Main Items CODE A B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● *1: If message, SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. *2: If you drive primarily in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). CODE 1 2 ● ● ● ● 3 4 ● ● ● 5 ● Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid*4 Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Maintenance ● Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil*1 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system# Inspect fuel lines and connections# Check expiration date for TRK bottle Sub Items *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty. Continued 233 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 234 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance MinderTM u ■ Resetting the Display 1Resetting the Display Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service. Maintenance Item Codes Engine Oil Life The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself. (Information) Button SEL/RESET Button Maintenance 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the SEL/RESET button. 3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds or more. u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display. 4. Select RESET with the button. u The service code will disappear and the engine oil life display will return to 100%. To cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. 234 NOTICE Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 235 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood Brake Fluid (Black Cap) Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange Handle) Washer Fluid (Blue Cap) Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Yellow Loop) Maintenance Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Fill Cap Radiator Cap 235 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 236 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood Opening the Hood Hood Release Handle 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly. 3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center of the hood to release the lock mechanism, and open the hood. Lever Maintenance Grip Clip 236 NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers. When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched. Pull Support Rod 1Opening the Hood 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood. When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close. If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 237 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil Recommended Engine Oil • Genuine Acura Motor Oil • Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container. Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged. 1Recommended Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. Use Genuine Acura Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown below. Maintenance Ambient Temperature ■ Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade. 237 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 238 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole. 4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary. Maintenance 238 Upper Mark Lower Mark 1Oil Check If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil being careful not to overfill. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 239 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick. 1Adding Engine Oil If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components. NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage. Engine Oil Fill Cap Maintenance 239 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 240 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multiinformation display. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap. 3. Remove the bolts on the undercarriage and remove the under cover. Bolt Under Cover Drain Bolt Maintenance 240 Washer 4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container. 5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil. 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 241 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Oil Filter 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer. When installing the new oil filter follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work. Maintenance 6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it. 7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. 8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m) 9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 4.2 US qt (4.0 L) 10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine. 11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter. 12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil. 241 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 242 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant Engine Coolant Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water. We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly. ■ Reserve Tank 1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. Reserve Tank 1Engine Coolant NOTICE You will need a more concentrated coolant if you are driving in extremely cold temperature below −31°F (−35°C). Consult your Acura dealer for details about a suitable coolant mixture. If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible. Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components. Maintenance 242 MAX MIN Reserve Tank 2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. 3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 243 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant ■ Radiator Radiator Cap 1Radiator 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the coolant system. Do not push the cap down when turning. 3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it. 4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully. 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back on the reserve tank. 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment. Maintenance 243 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 244 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid Transmission Fluid ■ Automatic Transmission Fluid Specified fluid: Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) Maintenance 244 Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature. 1. Park on level ground, and start the engine. 2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then turn off the engine. u Perform step 3 after waiting for about 60 seconds (less than 90 seconds). 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the Rubber transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth. Cap Upper 4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the Lower transmission securely, as shown in the Marks Guide image. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. u It should be between the upper and lower marks in the HOT range. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. 1Automatic Transmission Fluid NOTICE Do not mix Acura ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Acura ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered by Acura’s new vehicle warranty. NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 245 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid Brake Fluid Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 NOTICE ■ Checking the Brake Fluid Brake Reservoir 1Brake Fluid The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage. If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement. MAX MIN Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible. Maintenance 245 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 246 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid Refilling Window Washer Fluid Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the cap. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. Level Gauge Maintenance 246 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 247 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Replacing Light Bulbs Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Headlight Bulbs High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3) Low beam headlight: 35 W (D2S for high voltage discharge type) NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. ■ High Beam Headlight Passenger side 1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir. The HB3 type is halogen bulb. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. Engine Coolant Reservoir Fastener Driver side Air Intake Duct Continued The exterior lights’ inside lenses (headlights, brake lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a vehicle wash or while driving in the rain. This does not impact the exterior light function. However, if you see a large amount of water or ice accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Maintenance 2. Remove the fasteners, using a flat-tip screwdriver. Remove the cover of the air intake duct and its upper part. Cover The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. 247 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 248 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs Driver and passenger side Coupler Bulb 3. Remove the coupler. u It can be removed by pushing the tab. 4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it to the right. 6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. Tab ■ Low Beam Headlights High voltage can remain in the circuit for a long period of time after the light is switched off. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the high voltage discharge type bulbs yourself. Ask a dealer to inspect and replace low beam headlights. Fog Light Bulbs Maintenance When replacing, use the following bulbs. Fog Light: 55 W 1. Remove the clip using a flat-tip screwdriver, and lower the under cover. Clip Under Cover 248 1Fog Light Bulbs NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. The fog lights are halogen bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 249 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs Tab Bulb Coupler 2. Remove the coupler. u It can be removed by pushing the tab. 3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light assembly and turn it to the right. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs 1Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the central pin to remove the clip. When replacing, use the following bulbs. Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker: 21/5W Inner Fender Screw Continued Maintenance Clip 1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the opposite side from the headlight being replaced. Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel to the left. Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the right. 2. Remove the holding clips and screws, and pull the inner fender back. 249 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 250 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs Socket Bulb 3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. 4. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until it unlocks, and remove. 5. Insert a new bulb. 1Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push until it is flat. Push until the pin is flat Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace the light bulbs. Maintenance 250 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 251 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulbs High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace the light bulbs. Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Brake/Taillight/Rear Side Marker Light: 21 W/5W Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W Cover 1. Remove the cover. u It can be removed by pulling it backward. Maintenance 2. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove the bolts. 3. Slide out the light assembly to the side. Bolts Continued 251 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 252 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light, Taillight Bulbs 4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. Remove the old bulb. 5. Insert a new bulb. Bulb Socket Back-Up Light, Taillight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Light: 21W Taillight: 5W 1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip screwdriver. Maintenance Cover 252 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 253 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs Bulb 2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. Remove the old bulb. 3. Insert a new bulb. Socket Rear License Plate Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. License Plate Light: 5W Lens 1. Push the tab on the left and pull out the lens and the socket attached to it. Maintenance Tab Continued 253 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 254 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs Tab Tab Lens Maintenance 254 2. Remove the lens. u It can be removed by pushing the tab. 3. Remove the old bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 255 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper arm may scratch the window glass. Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side. NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield. 2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab. Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw driver. 3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm. Maintenance Lock Tab Continued 255 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 256 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by pulling the tabbed end out. Blade Top Retainer Blade Maintenance 256 Indent Tab 5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade. u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and the retainer grooves. 6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the blade should fit in the indent of the wiper blade. 7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab. 8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 257 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber Wiper Arm 1. Raise the wiper arm off. 1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper blade; it may damage the rear window. 2. Pivot up the bottom end of the wiper blade until it comes off from the wiper arm. Blade Maintenance Continued 257 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 258 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 3. Slide the blade out of the wiper. Blade 4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and mount it to a new rubber blade. Retainer Rubber Maintenance 258 5. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 259 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated. ■ Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating. Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly. Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. ■ Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: • Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. • Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. • Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. • Excessive tread wear. 3 WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached. If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold. Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced. Maintenance At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month. 1Checking Tires 2 Wear Indicators P. 264 • Cracks or other damage around valve stem. 259 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 260 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information. Label Example a b The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front and rear. d The proper cold tire pressure for front and rear. d c Tire Labeling Example 1Tire Sizes Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below. Maintenance Maximum Tire Load Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size ■ Tire Sizes Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. 260 1Tire and Loading Information Label Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P225/50 R17 93V P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 225: Tire width in millimeters. 50: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17: Rim diameter in inches. 93: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating). 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 261 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling ■ Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. ■ Glossary of Tire Terminology DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture. Year Week Maintenance Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. 1Tire Identification Number (TIN) 261 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 262 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading DOT Tire Quality Grading The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings. ■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Maintenance 262 ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 263 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading ■ Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 1Traction ■ Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 1Temperature Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Maintenance 263 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 264 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators Wear Indicators Example of a Wear Indicator mark The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads. Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use). Maintenance 264 In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 265 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist) system to work incorrectly. 1Tire and Wheel Replacement 3 WARNING It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs. Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle. Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual. Maintenance 265 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 266 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. ■ Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Front 1Tire Rotation Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below. Front Direction Mark ■ Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Maintenance 266 Front 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 267 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked “M+S” tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving. Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding. 1Winter Tires 3 WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed. Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law. When mounting, refer to the following points. For winter tires: • Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. • Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: • Install them on the front tires only. • Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below: • Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can. • Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. • Drive slowly. NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle. When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits. Maintenance Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034 Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains. 267 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 268 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Battery Checking the Battery Test Indicator Window Check the battery condition monthly. Look at the test indicator window and check the terminals for corrosion. 1Battery 3 WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation. A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you. If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead: • The audio system is disabled. 2 Entering the audio security code P. 148 • The clock resets. When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it. 2 Adjusting the Time P. 86 • The navigation system is disabled. A PIN code will be required. 2 Refer to the navigation system manual Maintenance Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system. Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last. WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. The test indicator’s color information is on the battery. When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Rinse the terminals with water. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion. 268 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 269 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pushed, replace the battery. Battery type: CR1616 1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver. Push a button to pry open the transmitter. 1Replacing the Battery NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer. Keypad Screw Battery 2. Open the keypad. u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. Maintenance 269 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 270 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Climate Control System Maintenance Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter. We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust. Maintenance 270 1Dust and Pollen Filter Using an air freshener may reduce the deodorizing effect of the dust and pollen filter, and may reduce its life. If the air flow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 271 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Cleaning Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. ■ Cleaning Seat Belts Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. Opening 1Interior Care Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer. Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline. Continued Maintenance After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them off using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing. 271 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 272 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuCleaninguInterior Care ■ Floor Mats 1Floor Mats To unlock Driver’s floor mat is shown. The front floor mats hook over the floor anchors, which keep the mats from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats. ■ Maintaining Genuine Leather Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. Maintenance 272 If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 273 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuCleaninguExterior Care Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it. ■ Washing the Vehicle 1Washing the Vehicle Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: • If driving on roads with road salt. • If driving in coastal areas. • If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces. Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine compartment. It can cause a malfunction. ■ Using an Automated Vehicle Wash • Remove the audio antenna. • Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated vehicle wash. • Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. • Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment. Continued Maintenance ■ Using High Pressure Cleaners Air Intake Vents 273 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 274 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Applying Wax A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary. ■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water. ■ Cleaning the Window Wipe using a glass cleaner. ■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels Maintenance 274 Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. 1Applying Wax NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up spills immediately. 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin. 1Cleaning the Window Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 275 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Handling the Unexpected This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles. If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks .................... 291 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire .... 276 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 284 Jump Starting.................................... 285 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 287 Overheating ...................................... 288 How to Handle Overheating............. 288 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Brake System Indicator Comes On.. 292 If the EPS Indicator Comes On.......... 292 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks........................ 293 Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 294 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On.................................................. 290 Circuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse ........................................... 296 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 290 Inspecting and Changing Fuses ........ 298 Emergency Towing........................... 299 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door................................................. 300 When You Cannot Open or Close the Tailagte ...................................................301 275 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 276 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire This vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire. If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair. If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place. Handling the Unexpected 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. 2. Put the shift lever in (P . 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 . ■ Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire Pressure Gauge Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) The kit should not be used in the following situations. Instead, contact a dealer or a roadside assistant to have the vehicle towed. • The tire sealant has expired. • More than two tires are punctured. • The puncture is greater than 3/16 inch (4mm) in diameter. • The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is outside the tire tread. Contact Area When the puncture is: Kit Use Smaller than 3/16 inch (4mm) Yes Larger than 3/16 inch (4mm) No AIR ONLY side Inflator Switch • Damage has been caused by driving with the tire extremely under inflated. Tire Sealant Expiration Date Pressure Relief Button Instruction Manual Air Only Hose (Black) 276 1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire • The tire bead is no longer seated. • The rim is damaged. Repair Notification Label Power Plug Speed Restriction Label Selector Switch SEALANT/AIR side Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be able to repair the puncture using the kit. NOTICE Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the one provided in the kit that came with your vehicle. If used, you may permanently damage the tire pressure sensor. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 277 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu 1. Pull the handle on the cargo area floor lid and open the lid. Handle 1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire When making a temporary repair, carefully read the instruction manual provided with the kit. In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily. In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before using. Lid Strap Tire Repair Kit Continued Handling the Unexpected 2. Pull the strap and take the kit out of the case. u Place the kit face up, on flat ground near the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not place the kit on its side. 277 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 278 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu ■ Injecting Sealant and Air Valve Cap 1Injecting Sealant and Air 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. The sealant is latex based and can permanently stain clothing and other materials. Be careful during handling and wipe up any spills immediately. NOTICE Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket and compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged. Valve Stem Handling the Unexpected 2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the packaging. Sealant/Air Hose Sealant/Air Hose Valve Stem 278 3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire valve stem. Screw it until it is tight. There are three accessory power sockets: • In the console compartment • In the front of the center console • In the left side panel in the cargo area 2 Accessory Power Sockets P. 134 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 279 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu 4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory power socket. Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or window. u Do not plug any other electric devices into other accessory power sockets. 5. Start the engine. u Keep the engine running while injecting sealant and air. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 61 SEALANT/AIR side Pressure Gauge ON OFF 7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts injecting sealant and air into the tire. 8. When the sealant injection is complete continue to add air. 9. After the air pressure reaches 33 psi (230 kPa), turn off the kit. u To check the pressure, occasionally turn off the compressor and read the gauge. Continued 3 WARNING Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide. Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors. Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than actual. After the sealant injection is complete the pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air compressor off only after the sealant injection is complete. Handling the Unexpected 6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/ AIR. 1Injecting Sealant and Air If the required air pressure is not reached within 10 minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for the kit to provide the necessary seal and your vehicle will need to be towed. See an Acura dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and proper disposal of an empty bottle. 279 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 280 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu Sealant/Air Hose 10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory power socket. 11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap. Valve Stem Repair Notification Label Handling the Unexpected ■ Distributing the Sealant in the Tire Speed Restriction Label 280 12. Apply the repair notification label to the flat surface of the wheel. u The wheel surface must be clean to ensure the label adheres properly. 1. Apply the speed restriction label to the location as shown. 2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes. u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 3. Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire Stop and recheck the air pressure after every 10 minutes of driving as necessary until you reach the nearest service station where you should have the tire permanently repaired or replaced. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 281 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu 4. Recheck the air pressure using the air only hose on the compressor. u Do not turn the air compressor on to check the pressure. 2 Inflating An Under-inflated Tire P. 282 Air Only Hose If the air pressure is: u Less than 19 psi (130 kPa), do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and have your vehicle towed. Continued Handling the Unexpected 2 Emergency Towing P. 299 u33 psi (230 kPa) or more, continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service station. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). uGreater than 19 psi (130kPa), but less than 33 psi (230kPa), add air using the pump until the tire pressure reaches 33 psi (230 kPa), then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service station. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 5. Repackage and properly stow the kit. 281 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 282 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu ■ Inflating An Under-inflated Tire You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire. 1. Pull the handle on the cargo area floor lid and open the lid. 2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire P. 276 Handling the Unexpected 2. Pull the strap on the under-floor storage. 3. Remove the kit from the case. u Place the kit on flat ground near the tire to be inflated, away from traffic. 4. Remove the air only hose from the kit. 5. Remove the valve cap. Air Only Hose Valve Cap Air Only Hose Valve Stem 282 6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve stem. Screw it until it is tight. 1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire NOTICE Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket and compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 283 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tireu 7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power socket. Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or window. u Do not plug any other electric devices to other accessory power sockets. 8. Start the engine. u Keep the engine running while injecting air. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 61 ON Pressure Relief Button 12. Turn off the kit. u Check the pressure gauge on the air compressor. u If overinflated, press the pressure relief button. 13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power socket. 14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap. 15. Repackage and properly stow the kit. 3 WARNING Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide. Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors. Handling the Unexpected AIR ONLY side 9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY. 10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts to inject air into the tire. 11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure. 1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire 283 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 284 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch to START (e and check the starter. Handling the Unexpected Starter condition Starter doesn’t turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it. 2 Jump Starting P. 285 Checklist Check brightness of the interior light. Turn on interior lights and check brightness. ● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all 2 Checking the Battery P. 268 If the interior lights come on normally 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 298 Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 199 Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started. ● 2 Immobilizer System P. 99 Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 74 Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 298 If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 299 284 1Checking the Engine 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 285 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Jump Starting ■ Jump Starting Procedure 1Jump Starting Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood. 1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle’s battery + terminal. 2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the assisting vehicle’s + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. 3. Connect the second jumper cable to the assisting vehicle’s - terminal. 4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable: Engine mounting bolt Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part. 5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly. 6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. Continued A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery. Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables. Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting. Handling the Unexpected Booster Battery 3 WARNING 285 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 286 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuJump Startingu ■ What to Do After the Engine Starts Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order. 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle’s battery - terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle’s battery + terminal. Handling the Unexpected 286 Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 287 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Shift Lever Does Not Move Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position. ■ Releasing the Lock Slot Cover Shift Lock Release Slot 4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing on the key, press the shift lever release button and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Handling the Unexpected 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver and remove the cover of the shift lock release slot. u Put the tip of the flat-tip screwdriver into the slot and remove it as shown in the image. Release Button 287 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 288 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Overheating How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: • The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power. • Steam is coming out of the engine compartment. ■ First thing to do Handling the Unexpected 288 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. u Move the shift lever to (P and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. 2. No steam coming out: Keep the engine running and open the hood. Steam coming out: Turn off the engine and wait until steam goes away. Then, open the hood. 1How to Handle Overheating 3 WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 289 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating ■ Next thing to do MAX MIN Reserve Tank 1How to Handle Overheating ■ Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs. 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs. Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible. Handling the Unexpected 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on. 289 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 290 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On Handling the Unexpected 290 ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. ■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. ■ What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary. 3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The light goes out: Start driving again. u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs immediately. If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs. 1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. 1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 291 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ■ Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink ■ Tighten Fuel Fill Cap Message ■ The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed. ■ What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed. u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once. 3. Drive for several days of normal driving. u The message should go off. NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged. If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected. Handling the Unexpected • Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. • Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools. 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on: Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above. 291 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 292 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator Comes On If the Brake System Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • The brake fluid is low. • There is a malfunction in the brake system. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. • If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. • If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. Handling the Unexpected 292 If the EPS Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • Comes on when there is a problem with EPS. • If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. 1If the Brake System Indicator Comes On Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears. If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately. 1If the EPS Indicator Comes On NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on the full left or right position for a while, the system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 293 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. ■ What to do when the indicator blinks Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. 1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level. Handling the Unexpected 293 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 294 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Fuses Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown. ■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Handling the Unexpected ■ Driver Side Fuse Box 294 Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. 1Driver Side Fuse Box Located under the dashboard. Fuse Label 1Engine Compartment Fuse Box Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 295 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Passenger Side Fuse Box 1Passenger Side Fuse Box Located on the lower side panel. Take off the cover to open. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Handling the Unexpected 295 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 296 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFusesuCircuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse Circuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse The current rating in brackets indicate that you may find a fuse in the location even if your particular model is not equipped with the device the fuse is used for. ■ Engine Compartment 1 Handling the Unexpected 2 3 296 Circuit Protected Battery Passenger’s Side Fuse Box EPS Passenger’s Side Fuse Box ABS/VSA FSR Power Tailgate Motor * ABS/VSA Motor − IG Power Tailgate Motor * Passenger’s Side Light Main Driver’s Side Fuse Box Driver’s Side Light Main Main Fan Motor − Wiper Motor * Not available on all models Amps 100 A 40 A 70 A (40 A) 30 A 40 A 30 A − 50 A (40 A) 30 A (60 A) 30 A 30 A − 30 A 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Circuit Protected Rear Defogger Sub Fan Motor − − Heater Motor Hazard Horn − Stop IG Coil FI Sub Backup Interior Lights FI Main DBW − MG Clutch Engine Oil Level Amps 40 A 20 A − − 40 A 15 A 10 A − 15 A 15 A 15 A 10 A 7.5 A 15 A 15 A − 7.5 A 7.5 A ■ Driver Side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Circuit Protected − Seat Memory Washer Wiper Meter ABS/VSA ACG STS Fuel Pump VB SOL SRS ODS IG1 − Daytime Running Lights A/C Accessory, Key, Lock Amps − (7.5 A) 15 A 10 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 15 A (7.5 A) 20 A (10 A) 10 A 7.5 A (7.5 A) − 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 297 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFusesuCircuit Protected and Amps for Each Fuse Amps 7.5 A (20 A) (20 A) (20 A) 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A (10 A) ■ Passenger Side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 A 9 10 A 10 A 15 A − (7.5 A) 10 11 12 13 * Not available on all models Circuit Protected Right Headlight High Beam Right Side Small Lights (Exterior) Right Front Fog Light Right Headlight Low Beam − Interior Lights − Passenger’s Side Power Seat Reclining Passenger’s Side Power Seat Sliding Right Side Door Lock Rear Passenger’s Side Power Window Console Accessory Power Socket Front Passenger’s Power Window Amps 10 A 10 A (10 A) 15 A − 7.5 A − 20 A 20 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Circuit Protected − Premium AMP Rear Accessory Power Socket − − Seat Heater − − − Amps − (20 A) (20 A) − − 20 A − − − Handling the Unexpected Circuit Protected 18 Accessory 19 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding 20 Moonroof Driver’s Power Seat 21 Reclining Rear Driver’s Side Power 22 Window Front Accessory Power 23 Socket 24 Driver’s Power Window 25 Driver’s Side Door Lock 26 Left Front Fog Light Left Side Small Lights 27 (Exterior) 28 Left Headlight High Beam 29 TPMS 30 Left Headlight Low Beam 31 − 32 Engine Oil Level * 20 A 297 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 298 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses Inspecting and Changing Fuses Fuse Blown Fuse Combined Fuse Handling the Unexpected Blown Fuse Fuse Puller 298 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 . Turn headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one. 4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one. 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement fuse with the proper rating for the circuit, install one with a lower rating. Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 296 and P. 297. There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 299 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Emergency Towing Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. ■ Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle. ■ Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight. NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission. Handling the Unexpected Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break. 299 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 300 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ■ What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure. 1. Open the tailgate and remove the lid. 2 Side Storage Compartment P. 132 2. Remove the cover, turn it by using a flat-tip screwdriver or coin, then pry it out. Cover Handling the Unexpected 300 3. Pull the release lever towards you. u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door when it is pulled, and locks when returned to its original position. 1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked. 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 301 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 When You Cannot Open or Close the Tailagte ■ When You Cannot Open or Close the Tailgate If you cannot open or close the tailgate or power tailgate, use the following procedure. 1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the Cover cover on the back of the tailgate. 2. To open the tailgate, pull the tailgate while pushing down the lever. What to do-Following up After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked. When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object. Handling the Unexpected Model with power tailgate 1When You Cannot Open or Close the Tailgate Lever Model without power tailgate Lever 301 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 302 302 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 303 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Information This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation. Specifications.................................... 304 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).. 306 Engine Number and Transmission Number ......................................306 Devices that Emit Radio Waves....... 307 Reporting Safety Defects................. 308 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 309 Warranty Coverages ........................ 311 Authorized Manuals......................... 313 Client Service Information ............... 314 303 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 304 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Specifications Information 304 ■ Vehicle Specifications ■ Engine Specifications Model No. of Passengers: Front Rear Total Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type Displacement Acura TSX Sport Wagon 2 3 5 4,630 lbs (2,100 kg) Spark Plugs 144 cu-in (2,354 cm3) NGK ILZKR7B-11S DENSO SXU22HCR11S ■ Fuel Fuel: Type Fuel Tank Capacity Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 91 or higher 18.5 US gal (70 ℓ) ■ Battery 2,410 lbs (1,095 kg) Capacity/Type 2,270 lbs (1,030 kg) ■ Washer Fluid Tank Capacity HFC-134a (R-134a) 15.8 – 17.6 oz (450 – 500 g) SP-10 36AH(5)/45AH(20) 36AH(5)/47AH(20) 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ) ■ Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) Headlights (High Beam) Fog Lights Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Lights Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights Rear Turn Signal Lights Back-Up Lights Taillights High-Mount Brake Light License Plate Lights Cargo Area Lights Interior Lights Spotlight Ceiling Light Vanity Mirror Lights Courtesy Lights 35W (D2S) 60W (HB3) 55W (H11) 21/5W LED 21/5W 21W 21W 5W LED 5W 5W 8W 8W 2W 3.8W 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 305 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuSpecificationsu ■ Brake Fluid Specified ■ Engine Oil Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ■ Transmission Fluid Specified Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid) 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ) (Change) Recommended Capacity ■ Tire ·Acura Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ) Change including 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ) filter Regular Wheel Size Size Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Regular P225/50R17 93V 33 (230 [2.3]) 17 x 7.5J ■ Engine Coolant Specified Ratio Capacity Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 50/50 with distilled water 1.64 US gal (6.2 ℓ) (change including the remaining 0.196 US gal (0.74 ℓ) in the reserve tank) Information 305 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 306 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the image below for the VIN locations. Engine Number and Transmission Number See the image below for the locations of your vehicle’s engine number and transmission number. Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number Information Automatic Transmission Number 306 Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 307 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Devices that Emit Radio Waves The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation. AcuraLink Bluetooth® Audio HomeLink®Universal Transceiver Remote Transmitter Audio System Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Immobilizer System Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) described below: As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Information Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 307 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 308 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. Information 308 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 309 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system. Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected. To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w , without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. 1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions. If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer. If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following: Continued Information 1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 °F and 95 °F (4 °C and 35 °C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes). 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds. 309 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 310 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes 7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). 8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes. Information 310 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 311 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Warranty Coverages Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems, and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship. Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information. Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship. Continued Information Accessory Limited Warranty – Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details. 311 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 312 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 uuWarranty Coveragesu Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer. Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle. Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2012 Acura warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet. Information 312 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 313 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Authorized Manuals The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering other models’ or other years’ manuals. Publication Form Number 61TL203 61TL203EL 61TL231 31TL7610 31TL1830 31TL7M10 31TL7Q10 2011-2012 Acura TSX L4 Sedan/Sport Wagon Service Manual 2011-2012 Acura TSX Electrical Troubleshooting Manual 2009-2012 Acura TSX Body Repair Manual 2012 Acura TSX Owner’s Manual 2012 Acura TSX Navigation System Owner’s Manual 2012 Acura TSX Maintenance Journal 2012 Acura TSX Advanced Technology Guide Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired Service Manual: Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman technician, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual: Complements the Service Manual by providing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle. Body Repair Manual: Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts. Information ACU-R Form Description 1Authorized Manuals 313 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 314 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Client Service Information Acura dealer personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership’s service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership’s management, contact Acura Client Relations. U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Relations Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 382-2238 Information 314 In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands: Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: (787) 620-7546 1Client Service Information When you call or write, please give us the following information: • Vehicle Identification Number 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) P. 306 • Date of purchase • Odometer reading of your vehicle • Your name, address, and telephone number • A detailed description of the problem • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 315 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Index Index A Auto Door Lock/Unlock.............................. 92 Customize........................................... 80, 82 Automatic Lighting .................................. 107 Automatic Transmission........................... 202 Creeping ................................................. 202 Fluid........................................................ 244 Kickdown................................................ 202 Operating the Shift Lever................... 13, 204 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 205 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 287 Shifting ................................................... 203 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 148 Average Fuel Economy .............................. 77 Average Speed ........................................... 78 B Battery ...................................................... 268 Charging System Indicator................. 65, 290 Jump Starting.......................................... 285 Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 268 Maintenance (Replacing) ......................... 269 Belts (Seat) .................................................. 26 Beverage Holders ..................................... 133 Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 164 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................... 175 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 60 Brake System ............................................ 216 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................... 218 Brake Assist System ................................. 219 Fluid........................................................ 245 Index ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 218 Accessories and Modifications ................ 225 Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 134 Active Head Restraints............................. 124 Additives Coolant .................................................. 242 Engine Oil ............................................... 237 Washer ................................................... 246 Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 237 Adjusting Armrest .................................................. 126 Front Seats.............................................. 118 Head Restraints....................................... 120 Headlights .............................................. 247 Mirrors.................................................... 116 Rear Seats............................................... 125 Steering Wheel ....................................... 115 Temperature ............................................. 77 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System).................................................... 140 Changing the Mode................................ 140 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 141 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 270 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 140 Sensor .................................................... 143 Synchronized Mode ................................ 142 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 140 Air Pressure ...................................... 260, 305 Airbags ........................................................ 34 Advanced Airbags ..................................... 40 After a Collision......................................... 38 Airbag Care ............................................... 48 Event Data Recorder .................................. 19 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 37 Indicator ........................................ 45, 67, 70 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 46 Sensors...................................................... 34 Side Airbag Cutoff System ......................... 43 Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 47 Side Airbags .............................................. 41 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 44 AM/FM Radio ............................................ 151 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 218 Indicator .................................................... 66 Armrest ..................................................... 126 Audio System ............................................ 146 Adjusting the Sound ................................ 150 Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 148 Error Messages ........................................ 166 General Information ................................ 169 MP3/WMA/AAC ...................................... 161 Recommended CDs ................................. 170 Recommended Devices ............................ 172 Remote Controls ..................................... 168 Security Code .......................................... 148 Theft Protection....................................... 148 USB Adapter Cable .................................. 147 USB Flash Drives ...................................... 172 Authorized Manuals................................. 313 315 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 316 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Foot Brake ............................................... 217 Indicator ............................................ 64, 292 Parking Brake .......................................... 216 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 111 Bulb Replacement..................................... 247 Back-Up Lights......................................... 252 Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 251 Fog Lights................................................ 248 Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Lights..................................................... 249 Headlights ............................................... 247 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 251 License Plate ............................................ 253 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights..................................................... 250 Bulb Specifications.................................... 304 C Index 316 Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 61 Cargo Hooks.............................................. 136 Carrying Cargo.................................. 191, 193 CD Player ................................................... 155 Certification Label .................................... 306 Changing Bulbs......................................... 247 Charging System Indicator ................. 65, 290 Child Safety ................................................. 49 Childproof Door Locks ............................... 92 Child Seat .................................................... 49 Booster Seats............................................. 60 Child Seat for Infants................................. 51 Child Seat for Small Children..................... 52 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.................................................. 56 Larger Children ......................................... 59 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 51 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 53 Using a Tether........................................... 57 Childproof Door Locks ............................... 92 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 273 Cleaning the Interior................................ 271 Client Service Information ....................... 314 Climate Control System............................ 140 Changing the Mode ................................ 140 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 141 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 270 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 140 Sensors ................................................... 143 Synchronized Mode................................. 142 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 140 Clock............................................................ 86 Coat Hook................................................. 135 Compass .................................................... 187 Console Compartment ............................. 130 Controls....................................................... 85 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 242 Adding to the Radiator............................ 243 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 242 Overheating ............................................ 288 Temperature Gauge .................................. 74 Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 202 Cruise Control .......................................... 207 Indicator ................................................... 71 Cup Holders .............................................. 133 Customized Features ................................. 79 D Daytime Running Lights .......................... 108 Dead Battery ............................................ 285 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ................................................. 141 Detachable Shelf...................................... 129 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 307 Dimming Headlights .............................................. 106 Rear View Mirror..................................... 116 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 238 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 106 Door Mirrors............................................. 116 Doors .......................................................... 87 Auto Door Lock ........................................ 92 Auto Door Unlock ..................................... 92 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator ....... 25, 68 Keys.......................................................... 87 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ................................................ 91 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ............................................. 89 Lockout Prevention System ....................... 90 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 317 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Driving ...................................................... Automatic Transmission .......................... Braking ................................................... Cruise Control ........................................ Shifting Gear .......................................... Starting the Engine ................................. Driving Position Memory System ............ Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 189 202 216 207 203 199 113 270 Displaying Oil Life .................................... 231 Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 64, 290 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 237 EPS (Electric Power Steering System) .............................................. 68, 292 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 61 Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 273 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 116 F Elapsed Time .............................................. 78 Electric Power Steering System (EPS) Indicator ........................................... 68, 292 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 210 Emergency................................................ 299 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 309 Engine....................................................... 306 Coolant .................................................. 242 Jump Starting ......................................... 285 Oil .......................................................... 237 Starting................................................... 199 Switch Buzzer ......................................... 105 Engine Coolant ........................................ 242 Adding to the Radiator ........................... 243 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 242 Overheating............................................ 288 Temperature Gauge.................................. 74 Engine Oil................................................. 237 Adding ................................................... 239 Checking ................................................ 238 Features..................................................... 145 Filters Dust and Pollen ....................................... 270 Oil ........................................................... 240 Flat Tire ..................................................... 276 Floor Mats ................................................. 272 Fluids Automatic Transmission........................... 244 Brake....................................................... 245 Engine Coolant........................................ 242 Windshield Washer.................................. 246 Fog Light Indicator ..................................... 70 Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 125 Foot Brake................................................. 217 Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 37 Front Seats ................................................ 118 Adjusting................................................. 118 Fuel ...................................................... 14, 221 Economy ................................................. 224 Gauge ....................................................... 74 G Gasoline (Fuel) Economy ................................................. 224 Gauge....................................................... 74 Information ............................................. 221 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66 Refueling................................................. 221 Gauges ........................................................ 74 Gear Shift Lever Positions Automatic Transmission .......................... 203 Glass (care)................................................ 274 Glove Box.................................................. 129 Index E Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 77 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66 Range ....................................................... 77 Recommendation .................................... 221 Refueling................................................. 221 Fuel Economy ........................................... 224 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 14, 223 Message.................................................. 291 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 14, 222 Unable to Unlock .............................. 14, 222 Fuses.......................................................... 294 Inspecting and Changing......................... 298 Locations................................................. 294 H Halogen Bulbs .................................. 247, 248 317 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 318 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Index Handling the Unexpected ........................ 275 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ............................... 175 Help Features........................................... 176 HFL Buttons ............................................. 175 Information Display.................................. 176 Making a Call .......................................... 181 Menus ..................................................... 177 Muting a Call........................................... 182 Phone Setup ............................................ 179 Phonebook .............................................. 183 Receiving a Call ....................................... 182 Sending Numbers or Names During a Call ..................................................... 182 Transferring a Call ................................... 182 Hazard Warning Button............................... 2 Head Restraints......................................... 120 Headlights ................................................. 106 Aiming .................................................... 247 Automatic Operation ............................... 107 Dimming ......................................... 106, 108 Operating ................................................ 106 Heated Door Mirrors ................................ 112 Heaters (Seat)............................................ 138 HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ............................... 175 High-Beam Indicator .................................. 69 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ............ 173 I Identification Numbers ............................ 306 Engine and Transmission.......................... 306 318 Vehicle Identification ............................... 306 Ignition Switch ......................................... 105 Illumination Control................................. 111 Knob....................................................... 111 Immobilizer System .................................... 99 Indicator.................................................... 70 Indicators .................................................... 64 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 66 Charging System ............................... 65, 290 CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 71, 208 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 71, 207 Door and Tailgate Open ...................... 25, 68 EPS (Electric Power Steering System).. 68, 292 Fog Light................................................... 70 High-Beam ................................................ 69 Immobilizer System ................................... 70 Lights On .................................................. 69 Low Fuel ................................................... 66 Low Oil Pressure................................ 64, 290 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 68, 212, 214 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 231 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 65, 291 Parking Brake and Brake System........ 64, 292 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 27, 66 Security System Alarm ............................... 71 Side Airbag Off ................................... 47, 70 Supplemental Restraint System............ 45, 67 System Message........................................ 69 Transmission ............................................. 65 Turn Signal................................................ 69 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) System ............................................ 67, 210 VSA® OFF.......................................... 67, 211 Information .............................................. 303 Information Buttons .................................. 75 Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 77 Instrument Panel........................................ 63 Brightness Control .................................. 111 Interior Lights........................................... 127 Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 116 J Jump Starting........................................... 285 K Key Number Tag ........................................ 88 Keyless Lockout Prevention....................... 90 Keys............................................................. 87 Lockout Prevention ................................... 90 Number Tag.............................................. 88 Rear Door Won’t Open ............................. 92 Remote Transmitter .................................. 89 Retractable Master Keys............................ 87 Types and Functions.................................. 87 Valet Key .................................................. 88 Won’t Turn ............................................... 17 Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ...... 202 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 319 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 M LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 54 Lights ................................................ 106, 247 Automatic............................................... 107 Bulb Replacement ................................... 247 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 108 Fog Lights ............................................... 108 High-Beam Indicator ................................. 69 Interior.................................................... 127 Light Switches......................................... 106 Lights On Indicator.................................... 69 Turn Signals ............................................ 106 Load Limits ............................................... 193 Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 87 Auto Door Lock/Unlock............................. 92 Childproof Door Locks .............................. 92 From Inside ............................................... 91 From Outside ............................................ 89 Keys.......................................................... 87 Lockout Prevention System ....................... 90 Using a Key............................................... 90 Lockout Prevention System ....................... 90 Low Battery Charge ................................. 290 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66 Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 64, 290 Lower Anchors ........................................... 54 Lubricant Specifications Chart ................ 305 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 193 Maintenance ............................................. 227 Battery .................................................... 268 Brake Fluid .............................................. 245 Cleaning.................................................. 271 Climate Control ....................................... 270 Coolant ................................................... 242 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 231 Oil ........................................................... 238 Precautions.............................................. 228 Radiator .................................................. 243 Remote Transmitter ................................. 269 Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 247 Safety ...................................................... 229 Service Items ........................................... 233 Tires ........................................................ 259 Transmission Fluid ................................... 244 Under the Hood ...................................... 235 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 65, 291 Map Lights ................................................ 127 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 193 Meters, Gauges ........................................... 74 Mirrors....................................................... 116 Adjusting................................................. 116 Automatic Dimming ................................ 116 Door........................................................ 116 Exterior.................................................... 116 Interior Rearview ..................................... 116 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 225 Moonroof.................................................. 104 MP3 ................................................... 155, 161 Multi-Information Display ......................... 75 N Numbers (Identification).......................... 306 O Odometer ................................................... 76 Oil (Engine)............................................... 237 Adding.................................................... 239 Checking................................................. 238 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 231 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 64, 290 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 237 Viscosity .................................................. 237 Opening/Closing Hood....................................................... 236 Moonroof ............................................... 104 Power Windows ...................................... 101 Tailgate ..................................................... 93 Outside Temperature Display.................... 77 Overheating.............................................. 288 P Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift Mode)................................................ 13, 205 Panic Mode ............................................... 100 Parking...................................................... 220 Parking Brake ........................................... 216 Index L 319 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 320 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ............................................ 64, 292 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 46 Passing Indicators ..................................... 106 Power Windows........................................ 101 Precautions While Driving........................ 201 Rain......................................................... 201 Pregnant Women ....................................... 32 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 276 R Index 320 Radiator..................................................... 243 Radio (AM/FM).......................................... 151 Radio Data System (RDS).......................... 152 Range .......................................................... 77 RDS (Radio Data System).......................... 152 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 309 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button...................................................... 112 Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 125 Rearview Mirror (Automatic Dimming) .. 116 Refueling................................................... 221 Fuel Gauge ............................................ 8, 74 Gasoline .......................................... 221, 304 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 66 Regulations ............................... 214, 262, 307 Remote Transmitter.................................... 89 Replacement Battery..................................................... 269 Bulbs ....................................................... 247 Fuses....................................................... 294 Tires ........................................................ 265 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 255 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 308 Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 76 Retractable Master Keys ............................ 87 Reverse Tilt Mirror.................................... 117 S Safe Driving ................................................ 21 Safety Check ............................................... 25 Safety Labels............................................... 62 Safety Message........................................... 20 Seat Belts .................................................... 26 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 30 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 28 Checking................................................... 33 Detachable Anchor.................................... 31 Fastening .................................................. 29 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.................................................. 56 Pregnant Women ...................................... 32 Reminder .................................................. 27 Warning Indicator ............................... 27, 66 Seat Heaters.............................................. 138 Seats .......................................................... 118 Adjusting ................................................ 118 Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 122 Front Seats .............................................. 118 Rear Seats ............................................... 125 Seat Heaters ........................................... 138 Security System .......................................... 99 Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 70 Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 71 SEL/RESET Knob.......................................... 75 Select Lever ........................................ 13, 203 Operation ......................................... 13, 204 Releasing ................................................ 287 Won’t Move ........................................... 287 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 53 Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 149 Sequential Shift Mode............................. 205 Setting the Clock........................................ 86 Shift Lever .......................................... 13, 203 Shift Position Indicator ............................ 204 Shifting (Transmission) ............................ 203 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 30 Side Airbags ............................................... 41 Cutoff System........................................... 43 Off Indicator ............................................. 43 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 44 Side Storage Compartment ..................... 132 Snow Tires ................................................ 267 Spark Plugs ............................................... 304 Specifications ........................................... 304 Specified Fuel ................................... 221, 304 Speedometer.............................................. 74 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 37 Starting the Engine.................................. 199 Does Not Start ........................................ 284 Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 105 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 321 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Jump Starting ......................................... 285 Steering Wheel ........................................ 115 Adjusting ................................................ 115 Stopping ................................................... 220 Sunglasses Holder .................................... 137 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 37 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ............................................ 2, 3, 105 SYNC Mode .............................................. 142 System Message Indicator ......................... 69 T Premium Gasoline ........................... 221, 304 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 276 Rear Door Won’t Open........................ 17, 92 Select Lever Won’t Move......................... 287 Warning Indicators .................................... 64 Turn Signals .............................................. 106 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 69 U Under-floor Storage Area........................ 131 Unlocking the Doors .................................. 89 USB Adapter Cable........................... 146, 147 USB Flash Drives ....................................... 172 V Valet Key..................................................... 88 Vanity Mirrors............................................... 5 Vehicle Identification Number ................ 306 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 210 Off Button............................................... 211 Off Indicator.............................................. 67 System Indicator........................................ 67 Ventilation .............................................. 140 Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 237, 305 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 210 Index Tachometer ................................................ 74 Tailgate....................................................... 93 Unable to Open ...................................... 301 Temperature .............................................. 77 Gauge ........................................................ 8 Outside Temperature Display .................... 77 Temperature Sensor ................................ 143 Time (Setting)............................................. 86 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..................................................... 212 Indicator ........................................... 68, 293 Tire Repair Kit .......................................... 276 Tires .......................................................... 259 Air Pressure..................................... 260, 305 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 259 Inspection ............................................... 259 Labeling.................................................. 260 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 276 Regulations ............................................. 262 Rotation .................................................. 266 Tire Chains .............................................. 267 Tire Repair Kit .......................................... 276 Wear Indicators ....................................... 264 Winter ..................................................... 267 Tonneau Cover ......................................... 139 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 195 Equipment and Accessories ..................... 196 Load Limits .............................................. 195 Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 198 Emergency .............................................. 299 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .................................................... 212 Indicator ............................................ 68, 293 Transmission ............................................. 203 Automatic ............................................... 203 Fluid ........................................................ 244 Number ................................................... 306 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 205 Shift Position Indicator ............................. 204 Trip Meter ................................................... 76 Trip/Reset Switch ........................................ 76 Troubleshooting ....................................... 275 Blown Fuse .............................................. 294 Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 17 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 18 Emergency Towing .................................. 299 Engine Won’t Start .................................. 284 Noise When Braking .................................. 18 Overheating ............................................ 288 W Warning and Information Messages......... 72 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 290 321 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 322 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 Warning Labels ........................................... 62 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately)............................................... 311 Watts ......................................................... 304 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 264 Window Washers...................................... 109 Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 246 Switch ..................................................... 109 Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 101 Windshield ................................................ 109 Cleaning.................................................. 274 Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 141 Washer Fluid............................................ 246 Wiper Blades ........................................... 255 Wipers and Washers ................................ 109 Winter Tires............................................... 267 Snow Tires............................................... 267 Tire Chains .............................................. 267 Wipers and Washers ................................. 109 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 255 WMA ................................................. 155, 161 Worn Tires................................................. 259 X Index 322 XM® Radio................................................. 153 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 323 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分 2012 TSX5D-31TL7610.book 324 ページ 2011年7月11日 月曜日 午前8時10分